Flexi Soft

Flexi Soft
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Flexi Soft
Gateways
EN
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
This document is protected by the law of copyright, whereby all rights established therein remain with the company SICK AG. Reproduction of this document or parts of this document is only permissible within the limits of the
legal determination of Copyright Law. Alteration or abridgement of the document is not permitted without the
explicit written approval of the company SICK AG.
2
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Contents
Flexi Soft Gateways
Contents
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
1
About this document.........................................................................................................7
Function of this document....................................................................................7
1.1
1.2
The Flexi Soft operating instructions ...................................................................7
1.3
Target group ..........................................................................................................7
1.4
Information depth .................................................................................................8
1.5
Scope .....................................................................................................................8
1.6
Abbreviations used ...............................................................................................8
1.7
Symbols used ........................................................................................................9
1.8
Trademarks ...........................................................................................................9
2
On safety...........................................................................................................................10
2.1
Qualified safety personnel..................................................................................10
2.2
Correct use ..........................................................................................................10
2.3
Environmental protection ...................................................................................11
2.3.1
Disposal .............................................................................................11
2.3.2
Separation of materials ....................................................................11
3
Product description Flexi Soft gateways......................................................................12
3.1
Device variants....................................................................................................13
3.2
Firmware versions ...............................................................................................13
3.3
Data transmitted into the network (input data sets) ........................................14
3.3.1
Logic results ......................................................................................17
3.3.2
Gateway direct output values...........................................................17
3.3.3
Module status and EFI status as well as input and output
values.................................................................................................17
3.3.4
Routing of data from a second network ..........................................19
3.3.5
Configuration checksums .................................................................19
3.3.6
Error and status information of the modules ..................................19
3.4
Data received from the network (network output data sets) ...........................23
4
Mounting and basic configuration of the gateways....................................................24
4.1
Mounting/Dismantling........................................................................................24
4.1.1
Steps for mounting the modules......................................................24
4.1.2
Steps for dismantling the modules ..................................................26
4.2
Electrical installation...........................................................................................27
4.3
First configuration steps .....................................................................................27
4.3.1
Establishing a connection between gateway and PC......................28
4.3.2
Configuration of the gateways..........................................................29
4.3.3
Transfer of a configuration ...............................................................30
4.3.4
Verification of a configuration ..........................................................30
4.3.5
Upload of a configuration .................................................................31
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
3
Contents
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5
4
Ethernet gateways .......................................................................................................... 32
5.1
Common features of the Ethernet gateways .................................................... 32
5.1.1
TCP/IP configuration interface......................................................... 32
5.1.2
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface .................................................... 37
5.1.3
TCP/IP process image example ....................................................... 46
5.1.4
TCP/IP socket monitor...................................................................... 48
5.2
EtherNet/IP gateway .......................................................................................... 52
5.2.1
Interfaces and operation.................................................................. 53
5.2.2
Basic configuration — Assigning a device name and
IP address ......................................................................................... 54
5.2.3
EtherNet/IP Class 1 communication — Implicit messaging ........... 55
5.2.4
Example configuration of implicit messaging with Rockwell
RSLogix 5000 ................................................................................... 60
5.2.5
Example configuration of implicit messaging with an
OMRON PLC ...................................................................................... 60
5.2.6
Ethernet/IP Class 3 communication — Explicit messaging ............ 60
5.2.7
Example for the configuration of explicit messaging...................... 72
5.2.8
TCP/IP configuration interface......................................................... 73
5.2.9
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface .................................................... 73
5.2.10
Diagnostics and troubleshooting ..................................................... 74
5.3
Modbus TCP gateway ......................................................................................... 75
5.3.1
Interfaces and operation.................................................................. 75
5.3.2
Basic configuration — Assigning an IP address .............................. 76
5.3.3
Configuration of the Modbus TCP interface to the PLC —
How the data are transferred........................................................... 77
5.3.4
TCP/IP configuration interface......................................................... 83
5.3.5
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface .................................................... 83
5.3.6
Diagnostics and troubleshooting ..................................................... 83
5.4
PROFINET IO gateway......................................................................................... 84
5.4.1
Interfaces and operation.................................................................. 85
5.4.2
Basic configuration — Assigning a device name and
IP address ......................................................................................... 86
5.4.3
PROFINET configuration of the gateway — How the data are
transferred ........................................................................................ 88
5.4.4
PROFINET configuration of the gateway — Which data are
transferred ........................................................................................ 92
5.4.5
TCP/IP configuration interface......................................................... 99
5.4.6
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface .................................................... 99
5.4.7
Diagnostics and troubleshooting ...................................................100
5.5
EtherCAT gateway.............................................................................................101
5.5.1
Interfaces and operation................................................................101
5.5.2
Installation of the gateway in the Flexi Soft system .....................103
5.5.3
EtherCAT configuration of the gateway .........................................104
5.5.4
Input data — Flexi Soft to EtherCAT ...............................................107
5.5.5
Output data — EtherCAT to Flexi Soft ............................................107
5.5.6
Tag name export .............................................................................108
5.5.7
Ethernet over EtherCAT (EoE) ........................................................110
5.5.8
TCP/IP configuration interface.......................................................110
5.5.9
CoE (CAN application layer over EtherCAT) ...................................111
5.5.10
Diagnostics and troubleshooting ...................................................114
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Contents
Flexi Soft Gateways
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
6
Fieldbus gateways........................................................................................................ 116
6.1
PROFIBUS DP gateway..................................................................................... 116
6.1.1
Interfaces and operation ............................................................... 116
6.1.2
Planning.......................................................................................... 119
6.1.3
PROFIBUS configuration of the gateway — How the data are
transferred...................................................................................... 122
6.1.4
Diagnostics and troubleshooting .................................................. 129
6.2
CANopen gateway ............................................................................................ 130
6.2.1
Interfaces and operation ............................................................... 130
6.2.2
CANopen configuration of the gateway — How the data are
transferred...................................................................................... 133
6.2.3
CANopen configuration of the gateway — Which data are
transferred...................................................................................... 136
6.2.4
NMT — Network management ....................................................... 137
6.2.5
SYNC ............................................................................................... 138
6.2.6
Emergency ...................................................................................... 138
6.2.7
Node guarding................................................................................ 142
6.2.8
PDO communication ...................................................................... 143
6.2.9
SDO communication ...................................................................... 145
6.2.10
SDO object directory ...................................................................... 146
6.2.11
Guarding protocols......................................................................... 153
6.2.12
Error objects ................................................................................... 155
6.2.13
CANopen diagnostics examples .................................................... 156
6.2.14
Diagnostics and troubleshooting .................................................. 159
6.3
DeviceNet gateway........................................................................................... 160
6.3.1
Characteristic of the DeviceNet implementation ......................... 160
6.3.2
Interfaces and operation ............................................................... 161
6.3.3
Setting up DeviceNet communication .......................................... 164
6.3.4
Supported DeviceNet features ...................................................... 166
6.3.5
DeviceNet protocol settings .......................................................... 167
6.3.6
Assemblies ..................................................................................... 167
6.3.7
Diagnostics and troubleshooting .................................................. 170
7
Layout and content of the process image ................................................................. 172
7.1
Routing.............................................................................................................. 172
7.2
Default settings for the operational data ....................................................... 173
7.3
Customizing the operational data (Flexi Soft to Network) ............................. 174
7.3.1
The toolbar...................................................................................... 175
7.3.2
Available data area ........................................................................ 175
7.3.3
Gateway data set to network area ................................................ 176
7.3.4
Tag names area.............................................................................. 176
7.3.5
Gateway direct output values........................................................ 177
7.3.6
Output data configuration (Network to Flexi Soft)........................ 179
7.3.7
Saving and loading a configuration............................................... 180
7.3.8
Importing and exporting a configuration....................................... 180
7.4
Monitoring the operational data online .......................................................... 181
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
5
Contents
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
6
8
Technical specifications ..............................................................................................182
8.1
Technical specifications gateways ..................................................................182
8.1.1
EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFINET IO.......................................182
8.1.2
EtherCAT..........................................................................................182
8.1.3
PROFIBUS DP ..................................................................................183
8.1.4
CANopen .........................................................................................183
8.1.5
DeviceNet........................................................................................184
8.2
Technical specifications, supply circuit ...........................................................184
8.3
General technical specifications......................................................................185
8.4
Dimensional drawings ......................................................................................186
8.4.1
Dimensional drawing FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD, FX0-GPNT and
FX0-GETC.........................................................................................186
8.4.2
Dimensional drawing FX0-GPRO, FX0-GCAN and FX0-GDEV .......187
8.5
Ordering information Flexi Soft gateways .......................................................187
9
Annex..............................................................................................................................188
9.1
EC declaration of conformity............................................................................188
9.2
List of tables .....................................................................................................190
9.3
List of illustrations ............................................................................................194
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
About this document
Chapter 1
Flexi Soft Gateways
1
About this document
Please read this chapter carefully before working with these operating instructions and the
Flexi Soft gateways.
1.1
Function of this document
These operating instructions only apply in conjunction with the other Flexi Soft operating
instructions (see section 1.2 “The Flexi Soft operating instructions” below). They provide
the technical personnel at the machine manufacturer or machine operating organisation
information on safe mounting, adjustment, electrical installation, commissioning as well as
on operation and maintenance of the Flexi Soft gateways.
These operating instructions do not provide information on the operation of the machine in
which a Flexi Soft modular safety controller and a Flexi Soft gateway is integrated. Information on this is to be found in the appropriate operating instructions for the machine.
1.2
The Flexi Soft operating instructions
For the Flexi Soft system there are three operating instructions with clearly distinguished
fields of application as well as mounting instructions for each module.
The mounting instructions (SICK part no. 8012482, 8012475, 8013272, 8012484 and
8013274) are enclosed with each Flexi Soft module. They inform on the basic technical
specifications of the modules and contain simple mounting instructions. Use the mounting instructions when mounting Flexi Soft safety controllers.
The Flexi Soft hardware operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012999) describe all
Flexi Soft modules and their functions in detail. Use the Hardware operating instructions
in particular to configure Flexi Soft safety controllers.
The Flexi Soft gateways operating instructions (this document) describe all Flexi Soft
gateways and their functions in detail.
The Flexi Soft software operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012998) describe the
software-supported configuration and parameterization of the Flexi Soft safety controllers. In addition, the software operating instructions contain the description of the diagnostics functions that are important for operation and detailed information for the identification and elimination of errors. Use the software operating instructions in particular
for the configuration, commissioning and operation of Flexi Soft safety controllers.
1.3
Target group
These operating instructions are addressed to planning engineers, machine designers and
the operators of systems in which a Flexi Soft modular safety controller is integrated and
who want to exchange data with a fieldbus (a controller) via a gateway.
They are also addressed to people who are placing a Flexi Soft gateway in operation for the
first time or maintaining it.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
7
About this document
Chapter 1
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
1.4
Information depth
These operating instructions contain information on the Flexi Soft gateways on the
following subjects:
mounting
implementation into a network
configuration via Flexi Soft Designer software
data transfer to and from the network
status information, planning and related mapping
part numbers
Warning!
Pay attention to the safety notes and safety measures on the Flexi Soft gateways!
WARNING
Note
We also refer you to our homepage on the Internet at
www.sick.com
There you will find the following files for download:
FX0-GENT EDS file for EtherNet/IP
FX0-GPNT GSDML file for PROFINET IO
FX0-GPRO GSD file for PROFIBUS DP
FX0-GCAN EDS file for CANopen
FX0-GDEV EDS file for DeviceNet
FX0-GETC ESI file for EtherCAT
1.5
Scope
These operating instructions are valid for all Flexi Soft gateway modules.
This document is part of SICK part number 8012662 (“Flexi Soft gateways” operating
instructions in all available languages).
These operating instructions are the original operating instructions.
1.6
CSV
EFI
h
SINT
UDINT
UINT
USINT
8
Abbreviations used
Comma separated values
Enhanced Function Interface
Hexadecimal notation (e.g. 72h = 114)
Short integer = 1 byte
Unsigned double integer = 4 bytes = 2 Words
Unsigned integer = 2 bytes = 1 Word
Unsigned short integer = 1 byte
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
About this document
Operating Instructions
Chapter 1
Flexi Soft Gateways
1.7
Notes
,
,
Symbols used
Notes provide special information on the device.
LED symbols describe the state of a diagnostics LED. Examples:
The LED is illuminated constantly.
The LED is flashing.
The LED is off.
Action
Instructions for taking action are shown by an arrow. Read carefully and follow the
instructions for action.
Warning!
WARNING
A warning notice indicates an actual or potential risk or health hazard. They are designed
to help you to prevent accidents.
Read carefully and follow the warning notices!
1.8
Trademarks
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager is a registered trademark of SIEMENS AG.
DeviceNet and DeviceNet Safety are registered trademarks of the Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association, Inc. (ODVA).
TwinCAT is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH.
®
“EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by
Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.”
Other product names and company names referenced in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
9
On safety
Chapter 2
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
2
On safety
This chapter deals with your own safety and the safety of the equipment operators.
Please read this chapter carefully before working with a Flexi Soft gateway.
2.1
Qualified safety personnel
The Flexi Soft gateway must only be installed, commissioned and serviced by qualified
safety personnel.
Qualified safety personnel are defined as persons who …
have undergone the appropriate technical training
and
have been instructed by the responsible machine operator in the operation of the
machine and the current valid safety guidelines
and
have access to the operating instructions of the Flexi Soft gateway and Flexi Soft
modular safety controller and have read and familiarised themselves with them.
2.2
Correct use
The Flexi Soft gateways can only be operated with a Flexi Soft system. The firmware version of the connected FX3-CPUx must be at least V1.11.0, the version of the Flexi Soft
Designer configuration software must be at least 1.3.0.
The Flexi Soft gateways do not have a dedicated voltage supply.
The Flexi Soft gateways are not suitable for operation on a safety fieldbus!
WARNING
These gateways only generate non-safety-related fieldbus data (status bytes) for control
and diagnostics purposes.
Do not use data from a Flexi Soft gateway for safety related applications!
With the Flexi Soft gateways it is possible to integrate non-safe data into the logic editor
such that the safety function of the Flexi Soft system is compromised. Never implement
the gateway into a Flexi Soft system without having this danger checked by a safety
specialist.
These modules may only be used by qualified safety personnel and only on the machine
where they have been installed and initialised by qualified safety personnel in accordance
with the operating instructions.
Pay attention to the safety notes and safety measures on the Flexi Soft gateways!
WARNING
Notes
10
If the device is used for any other purposes or modified in any way — also during mounting
and installation — any warranty claim against SICK AG shall become void.
During the mounting, installation and usage of the Flexi Soft gateway, observe the
standards and directives applicable in your country.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
On safety
Operating Instructions
Chapter 2
Flexi Soft Gateways
The national/international rules and regulations apply to the installation, commissioning, use and periodic technical inspection of the Flexi Soft modular safety controller, in
particular:
– EMC directive 2004/108/EC,
– Provision and Use of Work Equipment Directive 2009/104/EC,
– the work safety regulations/safety rules.
The operating instructions must be made available to the operator of the machine
where a Flexi Soft system is used. The machine operator is to be instructed in the use of
the device by qualified safety personnel and must be instructed to read the operating
instructions.
Use the Flexi Soft system in industrial environments only!
WARNING
The Flexi Soft system complies, as per the “radiated emissions” generic standard, with the
requirements of class A (industrial applications). The Flexi Soft system is therefore only
suitable for use in an industrial environment.
UL applications
For UL applications the device must be used with a Class 2 power supply or Class 2
transformer in accordance with UL 1310 or UL 1585.
2.3
Environmental protection
The Flexi Soft gateways are designed for minimum impact on the environment, they
consume only a minimum of energy and resources.
At work, always act in an environmentally responsible manner.
2.3.1
Disposal
Unusable or irreparable devices should always be disposed as per the applicable national
regulations on waste disposal (e.g. European waste code 16 02 14).
Note
We would be pleased to be of assistance to you on the disposal of these devices.
Contact us.
2.3.2
Separation of materials
Only appropriately trained personnel are allowed to separate materials!
Caution is required when dismantling devices. There is a risk of injuries.
WARNING
Before you send the devices for appropriate recycling, it is necessary to separate the different materials of the Flexi Soft gateways.
Separate the housing from the rest of the parts (in particular the circuit board).
Send the separated parts for recycling as appropriate (see Tab. 1).
Tab. 1: Overview on disposal
by components
Components
Disposal
Product
Housing, circuit boards, cables, connectors and electrical connecting pieces
Electronic recycling
Packaging
Cardboard, paper
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Paper/cardboard recycling
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
11
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Chapter 3
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
3
Product description Flexi Soft gateways
The Flexi Soft gateways allow the Flexi Soft System to send and receive non-safety related
data to and from the external fieldbus system for control and diagnostics purposes.
Note
In this manual, the data exchanged between the Flexi Soft system and the respective network will be considered always from the network master (PLC) point of view. Therefore
data sent from the Flexi Soft system into the network will be referred to as input data while
data received from the network will be referred to as output data.
Do not operate a Flexi Soft gateway on a safety fieldbus!
WARNING
The Flexi Soft gateway modules are not suitable for operation on a safety fieldbus. They do
not support any safety mechanism, which would be mandatory to communicate within a
safety network.
Configuration of the Flexi Soft gateways is performed using the Flexi Soft Designer configuration software on a PC or notebook connected to the FX3-CPUx over RS-232 interface or
connected to the Ethernet gateways over Ethernet TCP/IP.
The safety relevant logic of the Flexi Soft system operates independently from the gateway.
If however the Flexi Soft system has been configured to integrate non-safe information
from the fieldbus into the logic editor, a decoupling of the gateway can result in availablity
problems.
A Flexi Soft gateway can only be operated on a Flexi Soft system. It does not have a dedicated voltage supply. It is possible to use two Flexi Soft gateways per system.
The gateways are fitted in a 22.5 mm wide housing for 35 mm DIN mounting rails in
accordance with EN 60 715.
Ordering information can be found in section 8.5 “Ordering information Flexi Soft gateways” on page 187.
12
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 3
Flexi Soft Gateways
3.1
Device variants
Six Flexi Soft gateways are available for the different network types. Suitable for Ethernet
networks are the EtherNet/IP gateway FX0-GENT, the Modbus TCP gateway FX0-GMOD,
the PROFINET IO gateway FX0-GPNT and the EtherCAT gateway FX0-GETC. PROFIBUS DP
gateway FX0-GPRO, FX0-GCAN for CANopen and FX0-GDEV for DeviceNet are fieldbus
gateways without Ethernet functionality.
Tab. 2: Device variants and
features overview
Gateway
Network type
FX0-GENT
FX0-GMOD
FX0-GPNT
Note
EtherNet/IP
explicit messaging
EtherNet/IP implicit
messaging (only with
firmware O V2.00.0)
Modbus TCP master & slave
receive method
PROFINET IO slave
conformance class A
Ethernet TCP/IP socket
TCP/IP configuration
interface
interface
Client/server
Available at port 9000
Client/server
Available at port 9000
Client/server
Available at port 9000
FX0-GETC
EtherCAT slave
–
Available at port 9000
via EoE1)
FX0-GPRO
PROFIBUS DP slave
–
–
FX0-GCAN
CANopen slave
–
–
FX0-GDEV
DeviceNet-Slave
–
–
You will find the device’s date of manufacture on the type label in the S/N field in the
format yywwnnnn (yy = year, ww = calendar week, nnnn = continuos serial number in the
calendar week).
3.2
Firmware versions
The Ethernet gateways FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD and FX0-GPNT are available with different
firmware versions. To add a gateway to a Flexi Soft system in the Flexi Soft Designer’s
hardware configuration window, you must select the appropriate step from the drop down
list under the respective gateway.
Tab. 3: Firmware versions of
the Ethernet gateways
Firmware version
Step
V1.xx.x
V1.xx
O V2.00.0
V2.xx
You will find the firmware version on the type label of the device.
Notes
If you use the Flexi Soft Designer command Identify project to identify a connected
Flexi Soft system with a gateway, the software will recognize the correct firmware
version automatically.
1)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
The TCP/IP configuration interface for the FX0-GETC is only available after configuring EoE (Ethernet over
EtherCAT). See section 5.5.7 “Ethernet over EtherCAT (EoE)” on page 110 and section 5.5.8 “TCP/IP
configuration interface” on page 110.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
13
Chapter 3
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
3.3
Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)
Available data
The Flexi Soft gateways can provide the following data:
Operational data
– Logic results from the Flexi Soft main module (FX3-CPUx) (see section 3.3.1 on
page 17)
– Input values (HIGH/LOW) for all Flexi Soft input extension modules in the system and
EFI devices connected (see section 3.3.2 auf Seite 17)
– Output values (HIGH/LOW) for all Flexi Soft input/output extension modules and EFI
devices connected (see section 3.3.2 on page 17)
– Output data from another network, i.e. data received by a second gateway in the
Flexi Soft system (see section 3.3.4 on page 19)
– Gateway direct output values: It is possible to write logic results directly from the
logic editor into the gateway (see section 7.3.5 on page 177).
Diagnostics data
– Checksums (see section 3.3.5 on page 19)
– Error and status information for all modules except the UE410-2RO and UE410-4RO
(see section 3.3.6 on page 19)
Data sets
The physical Flexi Soft modules are not represented as typical hardware modules in the
network. Instead, the data available from the Flexi Soft system has been organized into
four input data sets.
Data set 1 (max. 50 bytes) contains the operational data. It can be compiled using the
Flexi Soft Designer tool. Upon delivery there is a default selection for the content of data
set 1 which can be freely modified. For details see Tab. 5 on page 16.
For the FX0-GPNT and the FX0-GPRO, data set 1 has been subdivided in five input data
blocks, where data block 1-4 contain 12 bytes each and data block 5 contains two
bytes. The FX0-GCAN holds four process data objects (PDOs) with 8 bytes each. For
detailed information see the section on the related gateway.
Data set 2 (32 bytes) contains the system configuration checksums. See Tab. 5 on
page 16.
Data set 3 (60 bytes) contains the individual module status and diagnostics data with
four (4) bytes per module. See section 3.3.6 “Error and status information of the
modules” on page 19 for details.
Data set 4 (60 bytes) is currently filled with reserved values.
14
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Chapter 3
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 4 gives an overview which data sets are available for each gateway.
Tab. 4: Availability of data
set 1-4
Data set 1
FX0-GENT
EtherNet/IP or TCP/IP
FX0-GMOD
Modbus TCP or TCP/IP
FX0-GPNT
PROFINET IO or TCP/IP
FX0-GPRO
PROFIBUS DP
–
Data set 4
EtherNet/IP or TCP/IP
Modbus TCP or TCP/IP
PROFINET IO or TCP/IP
–2)
EtherNet/IP or
TCP/IP
Modbus TCP or
TCP/IP
PROFINET IO or
TCP/IP
–
3)
CANopen
CANopen (SDOs)
CANopen (SDOs)
–
FX0-GDEV
DeviceNet
DeviceNet
DeviceNet
DeviceNet
FX0-GETC
Input and output objects
2000h and 2001h
Checksums
Object 2002h
Status and diagnostics
Object 2003h
Reserved
Object 2004h
3)
Subject to change without notice
EtherNet/IP or
TCP/IP
Modbus TCP or
TCP/IP
PROFINET IO or
TCP/IP
Data set 3
FX0-GCAN
2)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Data set 2
With the FX0-GPRO, diagnostics data are available via PROFIBUS standard DP-V0 diagnostics. For more information on how to retrieve module status and diagnostics data via the PROFIBUS DP gateway please refer to
chapter 6.1 “PROFIBUS DP gateway” on page 116.
With the FX0-GCAN, diagnostics data are available via CANopen SDO (service data objects) method. For more
information on how to retrieve module status and diagnostics data via the CANopen gateway please refer to
chapter 6.2 “CANopen gateway” on page 130.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
15
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Chapter 3
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 5: Overview input data
sets 1-3 (default settings for
EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP
and TCP/IP)
Data set 1
Data set 2
Data set 3
Total checksum
Module status module 0.
Module 0 is always the FX3CPUx.
For detailed information
about the module status see
section 3.3.6 “Error and
status information of the
modules” on page 19.
Flexi Soft checksum
Module status module 1
CPU0 and CPU1: Reserved
CPU2 and CPU3:
ACR checksum
Module status module 2
Flexi Soft checksum
(verify status)
Module status module 3
Byte 0
Logic result 0
Byte 1
Logic result 1
Byte 2
Logic result 2
Byte 3
Logic result 3
Byte 4
Input values module 1
Byte 5
Input values module 2
Byte 6
Input values module 3
Byte 7
Input values module 4
Byte 8
Input values module 5
Byte 9
Input values module 6
Byte 10
Input values module 7
Byte 11
Input values module 8
Byte 12
Input values module 9
Byte 13
Input values module 10
Byte 14
Input values module 11
Byte 15
Input values module 12
Byte 16
Output values module 1
Byte 17
Output values module 2
Byte 18
Output values module 3
Byte 19
Output values module 4
Byte 20
Output values module 5
Byte 21
Output values module 6
Byte 22
Output values module 7
Byte 23
Output values module 8
Byte 24
Output values module 9
Byte 25
Output values module 10
Byte 26
Output values module 11
Byte 27
Output values module 12
Byte 28
Gateway direct output values 0
Byte 29
Gateway direct output values 1
Byte 30
Gateway direct output values 2
Byte 31
Gateway direct output values 3
Byte …
Not assigned
…
Byte 49
Not assigned
…
Module status module 4
Module status module 5
Reserved
Module status module 6
Module status module 7
Byte …
…
Byte 56
Module status module 14.
Module 13 and 14 are
always the gateways.
Byte 57
Byte 58
Byte 59
Length
16
50 bytes
32 bytes
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
60 bytes
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 3
Flexi Soft Gateways
3.3.1
Logic results
Logic results generated by the logic editor of the Flexi Soft main module can be made
available to the network. Up to 20 bytes are available where each bit represents one logic
result from the logic editor. Data set 1 containing the logic results can be customized. For
detailed information see the chapter on the related gateway and chapter 7 “Layout and
content of the process image” on page 172.
3.3.2
Gateway direct output values
It is possible to write values directly from the logic editor into a gateway. There are four
bytes reserved for this in the default settings for data set 1, however up to all 50 bytes of
data set 1 can be defined as gateway direct output values. For more information please
see section 7.3.5 “Gateway direct output values” on page 177.
Note
In order to use gateway direct output values, a FX3-CPUx with firmware V2.00.0 or higher
is required.
3.3.3
Module status and EFI status as well as input and output values
The Flexi Soft gateways can transmit the status and all input and output states of all Flexi
Soft modules and EFI devices connected to the Flexi Soft system into the network. Data
set 1 containing the input and output values and the EFI information can be customized.
For detailed information see the chapter on the related gateway and chapter 7 “Layout
and content of the process image” on page 172.
Module status
The Flexi Soft gateways can transmit the status of the modules connected into the network. A total of 6 bytes are available for this purpose.
Tab. 6: Module status
Module status
Size
Meaning
Allocation
Status input data
2 Byte
One sum bit per module for the Bit 0 = FX3-CPUx
status of the module’s inputs
Bit 1 = 1. extension
0 = Error
module
1 = No error
Status output data
Position status
2 Byte
2 Byte
Bit 2 = 2. extension
One sum bit per module for the module
status of the module’s outputs …
0 = Error
Bit 13 = 1. gateway
1 = No error
Bit 14 = 2. gateway
One sum bit per module for the Bit 15 = reserved
status of the inputs and outputs (AND operator on input
data status and output data
status)
0 = Error
1 = No error
You will find information on the significance of the status bits in the operating instructions
for the software Flexi Soft Designer (SICK part no. 8012998) in the chapter “Module input
and output status bits in the logic editor”.
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
The input and output status for the XTIO and XTDI modules is available only with firmware
version V2.00.0 and higher.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
17
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Chapter 3
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Input values and output values of the modules
Input values for I/O modules
1 byte is available for data set 1 for each module.
The input values indicate the status of the pre-evaluation on the I/O module. This status
corresponds to the status of the element in the main module’s logic. The level on the
related terminal cannot be reliably detected by this means, as the data can be set low
by the cross circuit detection or the dual-channel sampling independent of the level on
the input terminal (e.g. I1-I8).
If dual-channel input elements are configured on an I/O module, then the less significant bit represents the status of the pre-evaluation on the related element (e.g. bit 0 for
I1 and I2, bit 2 for I3 and I4, bit 4 for I5 and I6, bit 6 for I7 and I8). The more significant
bit (bit 1, 3, 5 and 7) is used as follows:
Tab. 7: Usage of the more
significant bits on dualchannel evaluation on
I/O modules FX3-XTIO
Firmware version FX3-XTIO
Dual-channel equivalent
switches
Dual-channel complementary
switches
V1.xx
Same status as the less
significant bit
Inverted status of the less
significant bit
V2.00 and higher
Status of the pre-evaluation
0 = Error
1 = No error
I/O modules output values
For each module with outputs, 1 byte is available for data set 1.
The output values indicate the status of the control information from the main module’s
logic for the related element on the I/O module. The level on the related terminals cannot be reliably detected from this status, as the output may be disabled by the cross
circuit detection or the overload detection.
If dual-channel output elements are configured on an I/O module, then only the less
significant bit is used for the control information (e.g. bit 0 for Q1 and Q2, bit 2 for Q3
and Q4, bit 4 for Q5 and Q6, bit 6 for Q7 and Q8). The more significant bit (bit 1, 3, 5
and 7) is not used in this case (low).
Input values for MOCx modules
2 bytes are available for data set 1 for each MOCx module. The input values indicate
the status of the signals from the main module’s logic to the MOCx logic. Bit 16 and bit
17 of the usable bits from the main module to the MOCx logic are not available here.
MOCx modules output values
2 bytes are available for data set 1 for each MOCx module. The output values indicate
the status of the signals from the MOCx logic to the main module’s logic.
18
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 3
Flexi Soft Gateways
EFI system information
The FX3-CPU1 and FX3-CPU2 main modules have 2 EFI interfaces. An EFI interface is a
safe communication interface between SICK devices. It allows to …
read out information from the safety devices (e.g. C4000, S3000).
transfer commands to the safety devices.
The Flexi Soft gateways allow these EFI devices connected to the FX3-CPU1 or FX3-CPU2
to transmit their data into the network.
Note
It is only possible to select the EFI data in byte arrays. 4 byte arrays for each connected EFI
device are available. Some of the data content is reserved and can not be used at the PLC.
Further information about the properties, functions and benefits of the EFI interfaces can
be found in the Flexi Soft Hardware operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012999).
The general EFI function description is available in the operating instructions “EFI Enhanced Function Interface” (SICK part no. 8012622).
3.3.4
Routing of data from a second network
If your Flexi Soft system contains two gateways, it is possible to rout information received
by the first gateway from one network (e.g. from a Modbus PLC) into a second network via
the second gateway (e.g. to a PROFIBUS master) and vice versa.
3.3.5
Configuration checksums
Data set 2 contains the following configuration checksums for the Flexi Soft system.
Total checksum:
If ACR is deactivated: Same value as the Flexi Soft checksum
If ACR is activated: Checksum over Flexi Soft checksum and ACR checksum
Flexi Soft checksum:
This checksum covers the configuration of the Flexi Soft system, i.e. for all Flexi Soft
modules. The configuration of EFI devices connected is not included in the Flexi Soft
checksum.
Flexi Soft checksum (verify status):
This is the checksum of the Flexi Soft configuration that has been verified. If this
checksum is identical to the Flexi Soft checksum, then the configuration of the Flexi Soft
system is considered verified (CV LED lights up Yellow).
ACR checksum:
This checksum covers the ACR configuration for EFI devices.
Each checksum is four bytes long. Data set 2 can not be customized.
3.3.6
Error and status information of the modules
Data set 3 contains the module status information transferred to the network.
Four bytes are transferred for each module (e.g. FX3-XTIO). Data set 3 can not be
customized.
Notes
Reserved (for future use) = static 1 (no status change)
If no module is present, all values including the reserved values are set to logical 1.
The four status bytes for each module are being transferred in Big Endian format as
32 bit word, i.e. the most significant byte (MSB = byte 3) is transferred first and the
least significant byte (LSB = byte 0) is transferred last.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
19
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Chapter 3
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module status bits of the FX3-CPUx main modules
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Byte 0
Bit 7
EFI2
Bit 6
EFI1
Bit 5
Power supply
Byte 1
Bit 4
Configuration
Flexi Soft system
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 2
Summary of
bits 0.5 to 0.7
(power supply
and EFI)
Reserved
Byte 2
Byte 3
Bit 1
Internal tests
Flexi Link stations
suspended
1 = None
0 = One or more
Bit 0
Module
operating state
1 = Run
0 = Other
Flexi Link stations
in the system
1 = All found
0 = One or more
are missing
Reserved
Reserved
Tab. 8: Module status bits of the FX3-CPUx main modules
Module status bits of the I/O modules FX3-XTIO and FX3-XTDI
4)
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Byte 0
Bit 7
Reserved
Bit 6
Output
Fast Shut-Off
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Bit 5
Outputs power
supply
Bit 4
Configuration of
this module is
valid.
Reserved
External test
signal Input 8
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 4
Short-circuit
to low
External test
signal Input 7
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 4
Short-circuit
to high
External test
signal Input 6
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 3
Short-circuit
to low
External test
signal Input 5
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 3
Short-circuit
to high
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 2
Summary of
bits 0.5 to 0.7
(external error)
Bit 1
Internal tests
Input 7-8 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
signal Input 4
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 2
Short-circuit
to low
Input 5-6 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
signal Input 3
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 2
Short-circuit
to high
Input 3-4 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
signal Input 2
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 1
Short-circuit
to low
Bit 0
Module
operating state
1 = Run
0 = Other
Input 1-2 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
signal Input 1
Short-circuit
monitoring
output 1
Short-circuit
to high
Tab. 9: Module status bits of the I/O modules FX3-XTIO and FX3-XTDI
4)
20
The module status bits for the FX3-XTIO and FX3-XTDI are fully supported only with firmware version 1.2.x and
higher.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 3
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module status bits of the I/O modules FX3-XTDS
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Byte 0
Bit 7
Output load
(overcurrent)
monitoring
Bit 6
Reserved
Bit 5
Outputs power
supply
Byte 1
Byte 2
Reserved
External test
signal Input 8
External test
signal Input 7
External test
signal Input 6
Byte 3
Bit 4
Configuration of
this module is
valid.
Bit 3
Reserved
Input 7-8 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
External test
signal Input 5
signal Input 4
Reserved
Bit 2
Summary of
bits 0.5 to 0.7
(external error)
Bit 1
Internal tests
Input 5-6 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
signal Input 3
Input 3-4 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
signal Input 2
Bit 0
Module
operating state
1 = Run
0 = Other
Input 1-2 dual
channel input
evaluation
External test
signal Input 1
Tab. 10: Module status bits of the I/O modules FX3-XTDS
Module status bits of the I/O modules FX0-STIO
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Byte 0
Bit 7
Output load
(overcurrent)
monitoring
Bit 6
Reserved
Bit 5
Outputs power
supply
Bit 4
Configuration of
this module is
valid.
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 2
Summary of
bits 0.5 to 0.7
(external error)
Bit 1
Internal tests
Bit 0
Module
operating state
1 = Run
0 = Other
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Tab. 11: Module status bits of the I/O modules FX0-STIO
Module status bits of the Drive Monitor FX3-MOCx modules
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Byte 0
Byte 1
Bit 7
Reserved
User-defined
status bit 45)
Bit 6
Encoder 2
Bit 5
Encoder 1
User-defined
status bit 35)
Byte 2
Byte 3
User-defined
status bit 25)
Bit 4
Configuration of
this module is
valid.
Bit 3
Reserved
User-defined
status bit 15)
Reserved
Reserved
Bit 2
Summary of
bits 0.5 to 0.7
(external error)
Bit 1
Internal tests
Bit 0
Module
operating state
1 = Run
0 = Other
Reserved
Tab. 12: Module status bits of the Drive Monitor FX3-MOCx modules
5)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
The status of this bit can be defined to suit the specific application in the MOCx logic, e.g. to indicate
inadmissible movements of an axis that have been detected by an MOCx function block.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
21
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Chapter 3
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module status bits of the gateways
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Byte 0
Bit 7
Reserved
Bit 6
Communication
to the network
Bit 5
Communication
from the network
Bit 4
Configuration of
this module is
valid.
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 2
Summary of
bits 0.5 to 0.7
(external error)
Bit 1
Internal tests
Bit 0
Module
operating state
1 = Run
0 = Other
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Tab. 13: Module status bits of the gateways
Example
Module 2 (Flexi Soft XTIO) has a stuck-at-high error (24 V) on output 3. The following
module status will be transferred into the network (only the first 12 of 60 bytes are
shown):
Tab. 14: Example module
status in data set 3
Byte address
00
Byte
MSB
01
02
03
04
LSB
MSB
05
06
07
08
09
LSB
MSB
10
11
…
LSB
…
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
…
Value
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
EF
FF
FF
FB
…
Meaning
Status module 0 (CPU)
Status module 2 (XTIO)
…
Status module 1 (XTIO)
The first relevant byte for the error on module 2 described above is the module status
byte 0 for module 2. This is byte 11 with the hex value FB (11111011):
Tab. 15: Example module
status byte 0 of module 2
Bit #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Value
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
This corresponds to the error message “Summary of bits 0.5 to 0.7 (external error)”
(byte 0, bit 2 in Tab. 9).
The second relevant byte is the module status byte 3 for module 2. This is byte 08 with the
hex value EF (11101111):
Tab. 16: Example module
status byte 3 of module 2
Bit #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Value
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
This corresponds to the error message “Short-circuit monitoring output 3, short-circuit to
high” (byte 3, bit 4 in Tab. 9).
You will find an example process image in section 5.1.3 “TCP/IP process image example”
on page 46.
22
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Product description Flexi Soft
gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 3
Flexi Soft Gateways
3.4
Data received from the network (network output data
sets)
The data received from the network are organised in output data sets (max. 50 bytes).
These data have been subdivided in five data blocks holding 10 bytes each for the
FX0RGENT, FX0-GMOD, FX0-GPNT, FX0-GETC and the FX0-GDEV. For the FX0-GPRO output
data blocks 1-4 hold 12 bytes each while output data block 5 holds 2 bytes. The FX0-GCAN
has four process data objects (PDOs) with 8 bytes each.
Tab. 17: Output data blocks
1-5 for the different gateways
Gateway
Output data
block 1 size
Output data
block 2 size
Output data
block 3 size
Output data
block 4 size
Output data
block 5 size
FX0-GENT
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
FX0-GMOD
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
FX0-GPNT
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
FX0-GETC
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
FX0-GPRO
12 bytes
12 bytes
12 bytes
12 bytes
2 bytes
FX0-GCAN
8 bytes
8 bytes
8 bytes
8 bytes
FX0-GDEV
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
–
10 bytes
The contents of the output data blocks can be used within the FX3-CPUx logic editor and
can also be made available to another network via a second Flexi Soft gateway in the Flexi
Soft system.
Notes
In order to make the data from the network available in the logic editor or as input to
another network, you must define a tag name for each bit that shall be used.
Bits without a tag name will not be available in the logic editor nor for routing via a
second gateway. For detailed information on how to define tag names for the data
received please see the related section in the chapters on the different gateways.
The status of the communication to and from the network can be monitored in the logic
editor using the module input status bit for data from the network and the module output status bit for data to the network. When the gateway detects an invalid communication, the contents of the data sets will be set to zero (logical 0) and the corresponding
module status bit will also be set to zero (logical 0).
In case all communication is dropped, the data of the output data sets will be set to
zero (logical 0) and the module input status bit will also be set to zero (logical 0).
If a connection is closed while still others are available, the MS LED or the STATUS LED
on the related gateway flashes
Red/green for 10 s and an entry is made in the error
history. In this case, the status bits will not be affected.
Do not use the same output data set number for two different PLC connections or
TCP/IP sockets!
WARNING
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
The output data set can be written to the Ethernet gateways in parallel by all communication interfaces or TCP/IP sockets (e.g. Modbus TCP and Ethernet TCP/IP), if they use the
same output data set number. In that case, the last message overrides data received
earlier.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
23
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
4
Mounting and basic configuration of the gateways
4.1
Mounting/Dismantling
This chapter describes the mounting of the Flexi Soft gateways.
Make sure that the connection of the Flexi Soft gateway cannot lead to hazardous
situations during installation!
WARNING
Ensure that connecting a Flexi Soft gateway cannot lead to a hazardous situation when
implementing the unit on to the Flexi Soft system and Ethernet network. Prevent unintended start-up of equipment during connection of a Flexi Soft gateway.
4.1.1
Steps for mounting the modules
The Flexi Soft system must be mounted in an environment that corresponds to enclosure rating IP 54 (EN 60 529), e.g. in a control cabinet with the enclosure rating IP 54.
WARNING
While supply voltage is applied, modules must not be plugged to nor be removed from
the Flexi Soft system.
To ensure full electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), the DIN mounting rail must be
connected to functional earth (FE). Additionally connect all network cable shields
directly at the control cabinet entrance to a common FE ground line.
In a Flexi Soft system the main module FX3-CPUx is positioned at the extreme left.
The two optional gateways follow directly to the right of the main module.
Connect further Flexi Soft extension modules (e.g. FX3-XTIO or FX3-XTDI) onto the right
side of the gateways and any additional relay modules (UE410-2RO or UE410-4RO) to
the extreme right of the entire Flexi Soft system.
Ensure that suitable ESD protective measures are taken during mounting. Otherwise the
devices may be damaged.
The connection between the modules is effected by means of the plug connection integrated in the housing. Take into account that, when replacing a module, the Flexi Soft
modules have to be pushed approx. 10 mm apart before the corresponding module can
be removed from the DIN mounting rail.
Take suitable measures to ensure that foreign matter does not penetrate the connector
openings, in particular that of the system plug.
Mount the modules in accordance with EN 50 274.
The modules are located in a 22.5 mm wide modular system for 35 mm DIN mounting
rails according to EN 60 715.
24
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 1: Mounting the module
onto the DIN mounting rail
Make sure that the voltage supply of the Flexi Soft system is switched off.
Hang the device onto the DIN mounting rail ( ).
Connect the gateways directly onto the right side of the FX3-CPUx module of the Flexi
Soft system. Up to two gateways per system are possible.
Ensure that the earthing spring contact ( ) contacts the DIN mounting rail such that it
can electrically conduct.
Latch the module onto the DIN mounting rail by pressing it lightly in the direction of the
arrow ( ).
Fig. 2: Installing the end clips
If there are several modules, slide the modules together individually in the direction of
the arrow until the side plug connection latches in.
Install end clips on the left and right.
The following steps are necessary after mounting:
Complete the electrical connections (see section 4.2 “Electrical installation” on
page 27)
Configuration (see section 4.3 “First configuration steps” on page 27 and the Flexi Soft
Designer operating instructions, SICK part no. 8012998).
Checking the installation (see the chapter on commissioning in the Flexi Soft hardware
operating instructions, SICK part no. 8012999).
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
25
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
4.1.2
Steps for dismantling the modules
Fig. 3: Removing the
removable terminals
Remove the removable terminals with the wiring and the end clips.
Fig. 4: Disconnecting the
plug connections
If there are several modules, slide the modules away from each other individually in the
direction of the arrow until the side plug connection is separated.
Fig. 5: Removing modules
from the DIN mounting rail
Press the module downwards at the rear ( ) and remove it from the DIN mounting rail
in the direction of the arrow while keeping it pressed down ( ).
26
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Flexi Soft Gateways
4.2
Electrical installation
Switch the entire machine/system off line!
The system could start up unexpectedly while you are connecting the devices.
WARNING
Notes
The Flexi Soft gateways fulfil the EMC requirements in accordance with the basic specification EN 61 000R6R2 for industrial use.
To ensure full electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), the DIN mounting rail must be
connected to functional earth (FE).
The Flexi Soft system must be mounted in an environment that corresponds to
enclosure rating IP 54 (EN 60 529), e.g. in a control cabinet with the enclosure
rating IP 54.
Mounting in accordance with EN 50 274.
Electrical installation in accordance with EN 60 204R1.
The voltage supply of the devices must be capable of buffering brief mains voltage
failures of 20 ms as specified in EN 60 204R1.
The voltage supply as well as all signals connected have to fulfil the regulations for
extra-low voltages with safe separation (SELV, PELV) in accordance with EN 60 664 and
EN 50 178 (equipment of electrical power installation with electronic devices).
Ensure that all the modules of the Flexi Soft system, the connected protective devices
as well as the voltage supplies are connected with the same GND plane. The GND of the
RS-232 interface is connected internally to the GND of the supply of the main module
(A2).
Connect all fieldbus and Ethernet cable shields directly at the control cabinet entrance
to the functional earth (FE).
4.3
First configuration steps
This chapter describes the basic steps you have to perform for the configuration of the
gateway:
establish a first connection between the gateway and a PC or notebook
upload or transfer of a configuration
verification of a configuration
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
27
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
4.3.1
Establishing a connection between gateway and PC
Connect a PC or notebook to the RS-232 interface of the FX3-CPUx.
Power up the Flexi Soft System.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer configuration tool installed on the PC.
Click on Edit com. interface settings to ensure the correct communication interface
has been selected. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 6: Connection settings
dialog
To edit the settings, click on the pencil icon to the right. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 7: Modify profile dialog
Modify the settings if required and click OK.
Click OK. The dialog closes.
Click on Connect to physical device. The Flexi Soft Designer will search for connected
Flexi Soft devices and load the hardware configuration into the hardware configuration
dialog. Once all modules have been identified correctly, the Flexi Soft Designer will ask
whether the configuration shall be uploaded.
Click Yes to upload the configuration.
28
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Flexi Soft Gateways
As an example, the following hardware configuration may appear:
Fig. 8: Hardware configuration dialog
Click Disconnect to go into the offline mode if you want to change the configuration of
the Flexi Soft modules.
4.3.2
Configuration of the gateways
For the configuration of the gateways please refer to the sections on the related gateway:
section 5.2 “EtherNet/IP gateway” on page 52
section 5.3 “Modbus TCP gateway” on page 75
section 5.4 “PROFINET IO gateway” on page 84
section 5.5 “EtherCAT gateway” on page 101
section 6.1 “PROFIBUS DP gateway” on page 116
section 6.2 “CANopen gateway” on page 130
section 6.3 „DeviceNet gateway“ on page 160
For the configuration of the TCP/IP interface of the Ethernet gateways, please refer to the
following sections:
section 5.1.1 “TCP/IP configuration interface” on page 32
section 5.1.2 “Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface” on page 37
For the configuration of the operational data (data transfer from and to the network),
please refer to chapter 7 “Layout and content of the process image” on page 172.
More information can be found in the Flexi Soft Designer operating instructions
(SICK part no. 8012998).
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
29
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
4.3.3
Transfer of a configuration
Once you have finished the configuration, you have to transfer the configuration to your
Flexi Soft system. In order to transfer a configuration, perform the following steps:
Click Connect to go online. The Flexi Soft Designer connects to the Flexi Soft system.
Click Transfer to transfer the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Note
Depending on your current user level, you will be prompted to log on as authorized
client to be able to transfer a configuration. For details please see the Flexi Soft
Designer operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012998).
Once the transfer has been completed, you will be asked whether you want to run the
main module. Depending on your choice, click Yes or No to leave the dialog.
Note
You can also start and stop the application in the Hardware configuration view using
the Run application or Stop application buttons while the project is online.
More information can be found in the Flexi Soft Designer operating instructions
(SICK part no. 8012998).
4.3.4
Verification of a configuration
After the configuration has been transferred successfully, the Flexi Soft system can be verified. To this purpose, the downloaded configuration data are read back out from the Flexi
Soft system and compared with the project data. If they match, the data are displayed in a
report. If the user confirms that they are correct, the system is considered to be verified.
In the Hardware configuration view, click on the Upload and verify configuration
button. A report of the current configuration will be generated.
Click Yes below at the question Mark device as verified? if the displayed configuration
is the expected configuration. The system is then considered to be verified.
Notes
You have to be logged in as authorized user in order to mark the configuration as
“verified”.
If the verification is completed successfully, a “Read in and compare” report that provides the most important project information is created subsequently. You can print out
or store this report.
The status verified/not verified is indicated in the lower right-hand corner of the Flexi
Soft Designer and by the CV LED at the Flexi Soft main module lighting up.
Only if the device and the corresponding configuration have been marked as verified,
the “Auto Start mode” is active in the configuration of the main module. If the configuration is not set to verified, the system stays in Idle mode (CV LED on the FX3-CPUx
module flashing) after power-up and needs to be set to Run state using the Flexi Soft
Designer.
If differences between the project data and the read-back configuration data are detected, a corresponding message including information about possible actions is displayed.
Verification of the configuration is not possible then. Observe the information in the
error message for the further procedure. Terminate the dialog box by clicking Close.
If you change a verified configuration, the status is reset to “not verified”.
Exception: If you make only non safety-related changes such as modifying the gateway
name, the gateway’s IP address or the port number for a TCP/IP socket connection, the
configuration status remains “verified”.
More information can be found in the Flexi Soft Designer operating instructions
(SICK part no. 8012998).
30
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Mounting and basic
configuration of the gateways
Chapter 4
Flexi Soft Gateways
4.3.5
Upload of a configuration
When in online mode, you can upload a configuration from the connected Flexi Soft
system:
Click on Upload. The current configuration of the Flexi Soft system will be loaded into
the Flexi Soft Designer and can be edited after going offline.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
31
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5
Ethernet gateways
This chapter describes the following Flexi Soft gateways:
EtherNet/IP gateway (FX0-GENT)
Modbus TCP gateway (FX0-GMOD)
PROFINET IO gateway (FX0-GPNT)
EtherCAT gateway (FX0-GETC)
5.1
Common features of the Ethernet gateways
5.1.1
TCP/IP configuration interface
The Flexi Soft Ethernet gateways offer a TCP/IP configuration interface which allows the
configuration of the Flexi Soft system over Ethernet TCP/IP. This runs parallel to the
Ethernet TCP/IP or other Ethernet protocols.
Do not connect to the Flexi Soft system via the RS-232 and the Ethernet interface at
the same time!
WARNING
The Flexi Soft system can only communicate with one instance of the Flexi Soft Designer at
one time. Connecting to the Flexi Soft system using multiple instances of the Designer,
either on a single PC or multiple PCs, may result in inconsistencies of the configuration
and the diagnostics as well as in operational errors. This applies to both RS-232 and
Ethernet connections equally.
Consider the signal delay for remote TCP/IP connections!
WARNING
Remote TCP/IP connections to the gateway may be unstable if the signal delay is too
great.
Check the signal delay to the gateway using the ping command. Signal delays > 300 ms
may cause the connection to break down.
Possible solutions:
Make sure that the connection is fast enough or make another route if this is possible.
Or:
Use a software tool like Teamviewer or PC anywhere to control a local computer on
which the Flexi Soft Designer software is installed and connected with the Flexi Soft
system.
Or:
Contact SICK support.
In order to configure a gateway for TCP/IP configuration for the first time, perform the
following steps:
Step 1: Assign an IP address
Connect a PC or notebook to the RS-232 interface of the FX3-CPUx.
Power up the Flexi Soft System.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer configuration tool installed on the PC and load the
hardware configuration including the gateway.
32
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
If your project is online, click on the Disconnect button to go offline.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the desired gateway
or double click on the desired gateway in the hardware configuration view. The gateway
configuration view opens.
Click on the Gateway configuration button on the left hand menu. The following dialog
appears:
Fig. 9: Ethernet gateway
configuration dialog
On the left side of the dialog you will find the area for the gateway’s IP configuration.
If desired, enter a Device name for the Flexi Soft gateway.
Enter a valid IP address, for the Flexi Soft gateway, and if required a valid Subnet mask
and a valid IP address for a Default gateway.
Or:
If your network uses a DHCP server, activate the DHCP checkbox.
Click Connect to go online and transfer the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Notes:
If your project is online, you can use the Read IP address button at the upper left corner
of the gateway IP configuration area to retrieve the current IP settings of the gateway.
The out-of-the-box default IP address of the gateway is 192.168.250.250. You can find
the default IP address also on the type label of the gateway.
Step 2: Add a TCP/IP profile to your project
Connect one of the two Ethernet ports of the gateway with your Ethernet network using
a shielded Ethernet cable.
Connect a PC (or notebook) to the same Ethernet network. Ensure the IP address
settings of the PC match the network setup.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
33
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Note
You can also connect your PC directly to one of the two Ethernet ports of the gateway. In
this case, you can either adapt the IP address settings of your PC or the IP address settings of the gateway to match the other device’s IP setup.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer configuration tool installed on the PC and upload the hardware configuration including the gateway.
If your project is online, click on the Disconnect button to go offline.
Click on Com settings. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 10: Connection settings
dialog
Click on Add TCP/IP profile. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 11: Create new TCP/IP
profile dialog
Select your Ethernet network adaptor from the drop down list.
34
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Click on Scan to search for Flexi Soft gateways on your Ethernet network. Gateways
located will be displayed as shown in the dialog below. Their IP address will be displayed
as well as their MAC address and device name.
Fig. 12: Create new TCP/IP
profile dialog after scan has
been performed
Notes
Flexi Soft Designer with version O 1.4.0 performs an UDP scan. This means that all Flexi
Soft Ethernet gateways with firmware version O V2.00.0 (FX0-GMOD, FX0-GPNT and
FX0-GENT) in the network will be detected, even if they are in a different subnet.
A FX0-GETC can be detected as well, if it has been configured for EoE before (see
section 5.5.7 “Ethernet over EtherCAT (EoE)” on page 110 and section 5.5.8 “TCP/IP
configuration interface” on page 110).
Flexi Soft Designer version < 1.4.0 can detect only gateways with a matching subnet
address.
Select the gateway that you want to use for the new profile.
Enter a name for the profile to the Entry name edit field.
Click OK. The profile has now been created and is shown in the connection dialog:
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
35
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 13: Connection settings
dialog with new TCP/IP
profile
In order to use this profile, it needs to be activated.
Click on the Activate profile icon (white arrow in green circle) on the far right. The
profile will then be activated and marked as such:
Fig. 14: Connection settings
dialog with new TCP/IP
profile activated
Click OK. All communication to the Flexi Soft system will now happen via TCP/IP. In
order to use the profile via the serial interface again, you will have to re-activate it.
Note
The port number for the TCP/IP configuration interface is pre-set to port 9000 and can not
be changed.
Step 3: Connect via TCP/IP
Click on the Connect button to go online.
36
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
How to change the network settings of a Flexi Soft gateway:
Click on the Flexi Soft gateway network settings button. The Network scan dialog is
opened.
Click on the Scan button. Your network is scanned for connected gateways and the
devices found are displayed in the list.
Fig. 15: Found gateways in
the Network scan dialog
Notes
Flexi Soft Designer with version O 1.4.0 performs an UDP scan. This means that all Flexi
Soft Ethernet gateways with firmware version O V2.00.0 (FX0-GMOD, FX0-GPNT and
FX0-GENT) in the network will be detected, even if they are in a different subnet.
A FX0-GETC can be detected as well, if it has been configured for EoE before (see
section 5.5.7 “Ethernet over EtherCAT (EoE)” on page 110 and section 5.5.8 “TCP/IP
configuration interface” on page 110).
Flexi Soft Designer version < 1.4.0 can detect only gateways with a matching subnet
address.
Click on the gateway you want to edit.
Enter the new settings in the Edit IP address area.
Click on the Set device config button to transfer the new settings to the device.
Note
If the Flexi Soft Designer identifies a Flexi Classic series gateway in the network, this will be
displayed in the list as well. These gateways are equipped with an internal web server and
can be addressed using the Open web browser button.
5.1.2
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface
The FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD and FX0-GPNT Ethernet gateways support a total number of
four TCP/IP socket interfaces each. This allows multiple applications to communicate with
the gateway at the same time over Ethernet TCP/IP. The number of possible connections
depends on the gateway’s firmware version.
Tab. 18: Number of possible
TCP/IP connections
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Firmware version
Possible connections
Possible connections overall
per socket
V1.xx.x
1 per socket
4
O V2.00.0
6 per socket
24
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
37
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
The gateway’s proprietary network interface (e.g. Modbus TCP) runs in parallel and its configuration or usage does not interact with the TCP/IP socket configuration as it happens
independently on separate Flexi Soft Designer pages.
Do not use the same output data set number for two different PLC connections or
TCP/IP sockets!
WARNING
The output data set can be written to the Ethernet gateways in parallel by all communication interfaces or TCP/IP sockets (e.g. Modbus TCP and Ethernet TCP/IP), if they use the
same output data set number. In that case, the last message overrides data received
earlier.
The gateway processes the data of a Flexi Soft system and makes it available in different
compilations, the data sets. These data sets are available over the TCP/IP interface. For a
detailed description of the data sets please refer to section 3.3 “Data transmitted into the
network (input data sets)” on page 14.
In order to configure the Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface, perform the following steps:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the desired gateway
or double click on the desired gateway in the hardware configuration view to open the
gateway configuration dialog.
Click on TCP/IP configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 16: TCP/IP configuration
dialog
38
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Configuration of the TCP/IP interface — Who establishes the connection
If the Flexi Soft gateway shall connect to external applications, perform the following
configuration steps:
Activate the Connect to radio button.
Set IP address to the IP address of the computer the application is running on.
Enter the Port number for the application.
Note
The configuration is considered faulty if either the connect socket port and/or the connect
IP address is zero when in Connect mode.
If external applications shall connect to the Flexi Soft gateway, perform the following
configuration steps:
Activate the Listen on radio button.
Enter the Port number for the application.
Notes
Suggested port numbers are 9100 to 9103 (default values).
Port 0 and port 9000 are reserved and can not be used (faulty configuration).
Port numbers 0 to 1023 are managed by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
(IANA) and should not be used to prevent collisions. See
www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.
Finally, determine how the data are transferred. Follow the steps outlined in the following
section.
Data transfer method — How the data are transferred
Whenever the TCP/IP socket connection has been established (either by an application on
a PC or by the gateway itself), there are two possible methods how the data sets can be
transferred:
The application requests the data set(s) per command message (Application requests
(Polling) mode),
or
the gateway auto-updates the data sets as per configuration (Gateway writes to
Address/Port (Auto update) mode).
In Auto update mode there are two update modes how the gateways update the data:
Update COS (Change of state): when any data of the input data set change status.
Heartbeat interval: data will be sent automatically according to the configured
Heartbeat rate in ms.
Note
If Heartbeat interval is enabled, a change of state will trigger an immediate update of the
data as well, regardless of the set heartbeat rate. I.e. COS is always active.
For both methods the following structure of messages applies.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
39
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
General telegram structure
The request/response message (e.g. telegram) is structured as shown below:
0
1
…
…
…
…
Command
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Parameter(s)
…
n
Data
(content depends on type of command)
Tab. 19: Telegram structure
Parameter
Length
Description
Command
WORD
0h
= Undefined (no command)
Polling mode specific
00F1h
= Input data set(s) request message
001Fh
= Input data set(s) response message
Auto-update specific
00E1h
= Auto update control
001Eh
= Auto update control response
002Eh
= Auto update input data set(s) message
Digital outputs read/write
00F2h
= Write output data set settings
002Fh
= Response to write output data set settings
Parameter(s) Length
As defined in specific command
determined
by command
Data
Length
As defined in specific command
determined
by command
Error response to invalid messages
The gateway will set the most significant bit of the command word in the event that an
invalid or improperly formatted message is received.
Tab. 20: Error response
message
Parameter
Length
Description
Command
WORD
Bit 15 of received command will be set
(i.e. command of 00F2h would become 80F2h)
Following
data
40
Length
Unchanged. Returned as it was received
determined
by command
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Application requests (Polling) mode
In this mode the gateway will only send any data upon request (e.g. polling). Therefore the
application shall send request telegrams as per definition below and the gateway will
respond with telegrams structured as per definition below.
Note
In order to prevent that the connection will be closed automatically, the application must
request data at least every 30 s when Polling mode is active.
How to configure the Polling mode in Flexi Soft Designer:
In order to configure the Application requests (Polling) mode of the gateway via the Flexi
Soft Designer tool, perform the following steps:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the desired gateway
or double click on the desired gateway in the hardware configuration view to open the
gateway configuration dialog.
Click on TCP/IP configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 17: TCP/IP configuration
for Application requests
(Polling) mode
Activate the Listen on radio button.
Enter the Port number on which the application will connect.
For the Polling mode choose the Update mode Enable COS update.
Clear all Update data set n check boxes.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
41
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Get input data set(s)
The request message is sent by an application to the gateway. The request message
telegram shall be structured as shown below:
Tab. 21: Get data set(s)
request
Parameter
Length
Value
Command
WORD
00F1h
Request
data set 1
WORD
0 = Do not send data set 1
Request
data set 2
WORD
Request
data set 3
WORD
Request
data set 4
WORD
= Data set(s) request message
1 = Send data set 1
0 = Do not send data set 2
1 = Send data set 2
0 = Do not send data set 3
1 = Send data set 3
0 = Do not send data set 4
1 = Send data set 4
The response message is returned to the application by the gateway. The response
message telegram will be structured as shown below:
Tab. 22: Get data set(s)
response
42
Parameter
Length
Value
Command
WORD
00F1h
Data set 1
length
WORD
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Data set 2
length
WORD
Data set 3
length
WORD
Data set 4
length
WORD
Data set(s)
data
Array of
bytes
= Data set(s) response message
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
Data set(s) information
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Write output data sets
The following command message is sent by the application to the gateway to write to the
output data sets:
Tab. 23: Write output data
set setting command
Parameter
Length
Value
Command
WORD
00F2h
Output data
set 1 length
WORD
0 = Output data set not included in data set(s) data field
Output data
set 2 length
WORD
Output data
set 3 length
WORD
Output data
set 4 length
WORD
Output data
set 5 length
WORD
Data set(s)
data
Array of
bytes
= Set output data set(s) command message
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Output data set not included in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Output data set not included in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Output data set not included in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Output data set not included in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
Data set(s) information
The response message is returned to the application by the gateway. The response
message telegram is structured as shown below:
Tab. 24: Write output data
set setting response
Parameter
Length
Value
Command
WORD
002Fh = Response to write output data set settings
message
Status
WORD
0 = Success. Output data sets written correctly
1 = Error — Can not write output data sets due to either:
Loss of backplane communication
Incorrect routing information
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
43
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Gateway writes to Address/Port (Auto update) mode
The gateway can be configured to automatically update the data set information (i.e. the
application does not need to send any request messages as it would do in polling mode)
once the connection to the application has been made.
The configuration settings are available via the Flexi Soft Designer configuration tool or via
the TCP/IP interface itself. Using one interface does not disable the other: The auto update
mode could be enabled via Flexi Soft Designer and disabled via TCP/IP command, for
example.
How to configure the Auto-Update mode via the TCP/IP interface:
This command message is sent by an application to the gateway to configure the auto update mode. This message can be used to either disable or enable the auto update mode
directly through the TCP/IP interface.
Tab. 25: Auto update mode
configuration command
Parameter
Length
Value
Command
WORD
00E1h
Request
data set 1
WORD
0 = Do not send data set 1
Request
data set 2
WORD
Request
data set 3
WORD
Request
data set 4
WORD
1 = Send data set 1
0 = Do not send data set 2
1 = Send data set 2
0 = Do not send data set 3
1 = Send data set 3
0 = Do not send data set 4
1 = Send data set 4
Heartbeat
WORD
mode update
rate
Note
= Auto update control
0 = Disable heartbeat messages
Non-zero = Enable heartbeat message at specified rate in ms.
Minimum = 40 ms
Auto update is disabled if all Request Input Data Set flags are set to zero.
The response message returned to the application by the gateway:
Tab. 26: Auto update mode
configuration response
44
Parameter
Length
Value
Command
WORD
001Eh
= Response to the auto update control message
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
How to configure the Auto-Update mode in Flexi Soft Designer:
In order to configure the Gateway writes to Address/Port (Auto update) mode of the
gateway via the Flexi Soft Designer tool, perform the following steps:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the desired gateway
or double click the desired gateway in the hardware configuration view to open the
gateway configuration dialog.
Click on TCP/IP configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 18: TCP/IP configuration
for auto update
Activate the Connect to radio button.
Enter the IP address and the Port number the gateway shall write to.
Select the update mode: Enable COS update or Enable auto update and COS.
If you have selected Enable auto update and COS, select the Update rate in ms.
Select which data sets shall be updated: Check the Update data set n checkbox.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
45
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Normal operation
The following message is sent from the gateway to the application while operating in auto
update mode.
Tab. 27: Auto update mode
normal operation message
Parameter
Length
Value
Command
Data set 1
length
WORD
WORD
Data set 2
length
WORD
Data set 3
length
WORD
Data set 4
length
WORD
Data set(s) data
Array of bytes
(length dependent
on set definition)
002Eh = Auto update data set(s) message
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
0 = Data set not returned in data set(s) data field
Non-zero = Length of data set
Data set(s) information. Details see section 3.3 “Data transmitted into
the network (input data sets)” on page 14 and chapter 7 “Layout and
content of the process image” on page 172.
5.1.3
TCP/IP process image example
The following example shows a possible process image sent by a FX0-GENT gateway via
TCP/IP in auto update mode:
Tab. 28: TCP/IP process
image example
Byte values [hex]
Part of message
Meaning
00 2E
Command
Auto update data sets (see Tab. 27)
Length of data set 1: 50 bytes
00 32
00 20
00 3C
Command parameters
Length of data set 2: 32 bytes
Length of data set 3: 60 bytes
00 3C
Length of data set 4: 60 bytes
03 FF 03 03
Logic results 0-3
C0
Input values module 1:
C0 = 11000000 = Inputs I8 and I7 Active
Input values module 2:
03
03 = 00000011 = Inputs I2 and I1 Active
3F 05
05 05 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
Data set 1
(default byte assignments, see Tab. 5)
Input values module 3-12
Output values module 1-12
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
Not assigned
00 00 00 00
00 00
46
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Byte values [hex]
Part of message
Meaning
52 A1 10 4C
Total checksum (same value as the Flexi
Soft checksum)
52 A1 10 4C
Flexi Soft checksum
00 00 00 00
Data set 2
00 00 00 00
(see Tab. 5)
00 00 00 00
CPU0 and CPU1: Reserved
CPU2 and CPU3: ACR checksum
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
FF FF FF FF
Status module 0 (FX3-CPUx): OK
FF FF FF FF
Status module 1 (e.g. FX3-XTDI): OK
FD FB FF FF
Status module 2 (e.g. FX3-XTIO):
Byte 0: FF = 11111111: No errors
Data set 3
(see Tab. 5 and section
3.3.6 “Error and status
information of the
modules” on page 19)
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
Byte 1: FF = 11111111: No errors
Byte 2: FB = 11111011: Input 3 external
test signal failure.
Byte 3: FD = 11111101: Output 1
stuckRatRlow error
Data set 3 data is
transferred in Big Endian Status modules 3-6: OK
format, i.e. in 32 bit
double word format with
the most significant byte
placed in the leftmost
position.
Status modules 7-12 (no modules present)
FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF
Status module 13 (e.g. FX0-GENT): OK
FF FF FF FF
Status module 14 (no module present)
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
Data set 4
Reserved
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
47
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.1.4
TCP/IP socket monitor
The TCP/IP socket monitor allows you to view the input data sets that a gateway transfers
into the network via TCP/IP, issue commands to the gateway and to write data to the gateway’s output data sets.
The TCP/IP socket monitor is a separate program that is installed with the Flexi Soft
Designer. You will find the TCP/IP socket monitor in the Windows Start menu under
“Programs/SICK/Flexi Soft Designer/Tools/TCPIP socket monitor”.
In order to connect to the gateway via the socket monitor, at least one TCP/IP socket must
be enabled on the gateway (see section 5.1.2 “Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface” on
page 37).
How to use the socket monitor:
Power up the Flexi Soft system.
Connect one of the two Ethernet ports of the gateway with your Ethernet network using
a shielded Ethernet cable.
Connect a PC (or notebook) to the same Ethernet network. Ensure the IP address
settings of the gateway and the PC match the network setup.
Note
You can also connect your PC directly to one of the two Ethernet ports of the gateway. In
this case, you can either adapt the IP address settings of your PC or the IP address settings of the gateway to match the other device’s IP setup.
Open the TCP/IP socket monitor. The following window opens:
Fig. 19: Socket monitor
window
The TCP/IP socket monitor can connect to the gateway either as TCP client or as TCP
server, depending on the socket configuration of the gateway.
48
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
PC is TCP Client
If at least one socket is enabled and if the gateway is configured to Listen on this socket,
the PC can connect to the gateway as client.
In a dropdown list in the PC is TCP Client area, all available network adapters are
displayed:
Fig. 20: PC is TCP Client area
— Gateway is configured to
listen
Select the network adapter that is connected to the gateway. The MAC address and the
IP address of the selected network adapter are displayed beneath the dropdown list.
Enter the Flexi Soft IP address of the gateway and the Port number of the enabled
socket.
Click on Connect to establish the communication to the gateway.
PC is TCP Server
If at least one socket is enabled and if the gateway is configured to Connect on this
socket, the PC can connect to the gateway as server.
In a dropdown list in the PC is TCP Client area, all available network adapters are
displayed:
Fig. 21: PC is TCP Server area
— Gateway is configured to
connect
Select the network adapter that is connected to the gateway. The MAC address and the
IP address of the selected network adapter are displayed beneath the dropdown list.
Note
The gateway socket must be configured to connect to the local IP address of the PC.
Enter the Port number on which the enabled socket is configured to connect.
Click on Listen on to establish the communication to the gateway.
Once the connection to the gateway is established, the further proceedings are alike, no
matter whether the PC is connected as client or as server. It is possible to establish a
client and a server connection at the same time, if the gateway socket configuration allows
this.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
49
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Write data to device — How to control the gateway
The Write data to device area consists of three file cards which are used to assemble different commands that can be sent to the gateway. The commands are assembled automatically as you activate or deactivate the different options on the file cards and are displayed in the log window. A click on the Write button sends the displayed command to the
gateway. The Clear log button deletes the displayed command from the log window. It is
also possible to edit the command in the log window manually.
Under the Read input data sets file card you can request input data sets from the gateway
using the 00F1h command (see Tab. 21 on page 42).
Fig. 22: Write data to device
— Read input data sets
Activate all data sets that you want to receive. The command that will be sent is shown
in the log window.
Click on the Write button above the log window to send the command to the gateway.
The gateway will respond with a 00F1h response message (see Tab. 22 on page 42)
that will be shown in the Read automatic data from device area below.
Note
If the gateway is configured to send data sets on this socket cyclically or on change of
state (COS), the gateway’s response may be overwritten very soon by the next message
from the gateway. In this case you should modify the configuration under the Configure
input data sets file card (see below).
Under the Write output data sets file card you can write data to the gateway’s output data
sets using the 00F2h command (see Tab. 23 on page 43).
Fig. 23: Write data to device
— Write output data sets
Activate all data sets that you want to send and edit the data in the input field for the
respective data set. The command that will be sent is shown in the log window below.
50
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Click on the Write button above the log window to send the command to the gateway.
The gateway will respond with a 00F2h response message to indicate whether the
output data sets have been written correctly or if an error has occured (see Tab. 24 on
page 43). The result will be shown in the Read automatic data from device area below.
Under the Configure input data sets file card you can configure the gateway to send input
data sets either on change of state (COS) or cyclically (auto update) using the 00E1h
command (see Tab. 25 on page 44).
Fig. 24: Write data to device
— Configure input data sets
Activate all data sets that you want to receive, choose the update mode (i.e. either COS
or auto update and COS) and enter the Update rate (40 to 65535 ms), if auto update is
desired. The command that will be sent is shown in the log window.
Click on Write to send the command to the gateway. The gateway will respond with a
00E1h response message (see Tab. 26 on page 44) that will be shown in the Read data
from device automatically area below.
Depending on the configuration, the gateway will follow up with 00E2h messages, i.e. it
will send the activated data sets as on COS and cyclically as configured (see Tab. 27 on
page 46).
Notes
The initial behaviour of the gateway when you open the socket monitor depends on the
gateway’s configuration for the respective socket in your project or on the last 00E1h
command the gateway has received and does not correspond necessarily with the
settings displayed in the Configure input data sets file card.
The changes you make to the input data sets configuration here will not be stored in
your project but will change the behaviour of the gateway temporarily, i.e. until it
receives another 00E1h command or until the Flexi Soft system is restarted.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
51
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Read automatic data from device — Monitoring the gateway’s messages
The Read automatic data from device area shows the messages sent by the gateway.
Fig. 25: Read automatic data
from device
The last Command and the Data sets that have been sent by the gateway are displayed
in the grey part of the area. The data are displayed in blocks of four bytes. Data blocks
that have changed value since the last message has been received are highlighted
blue.
The log window shows the complete command string the gateway has sent.
The communication indicator in the upper left corner of the log window title bar lights up
green if currently data are received from the gateway.
The time stamp in the log window title bar indicates when the last command string has
been received.
The Clear log button erases the log.
You can choose from the dropdown list whether the next received command string shall
override the last one or if it shall be appended at the top of the log.
5.2
EtherNet/IP gateway
The following Flexi Soft gateway can be used for EtherNet/IP: FX0-GENT.
You will find the EDS files and the device icon for PLC interfacing …
in the Internet on the FX0-GENT product page on www.sick.com.
in the Flexi Soft Designer program folder on your hard disk (default installation folder is
“C:\programs\SICK\FlexiSoft\DeviceDescriptions\...”).
Flexi Soft EtherNet/IP gateways with firmware V1.xx.x support only EtherNet/IP explicit
messaging (Class 3). Implicit messaging (Class 1) is not supported. Please use the EDS file
SICK_FX0_GENT_1.00.eds for these gateways.
Flexi Soft EtherNet/IP gateways with firmware O V2.00.0 support EtherNet/IP implicit
messaging and explicit messaging (Class 1 and Class 3). Please use the EDS file
SICK_FX0_GENT_2.02.eds for these gateways.
52
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.2.1
Interfaces and operation
The FX0-GENT is equipped with an integrated three-port switch for connection to the Ethernet network. Two RJ-45 sockets are available for the connection. The switch functionality
allows the FX0-GENT to be used for connection to another Ethernet component (e.g. connection to a notebook) without having to interrupt the Ethernet connection to the network.
Fig. 26: Interfaces and
display elements of the
FX0>GENT
RJ>45 Ethernet socket
Power supply LED (green)
Network activity LED for Ethernet
port 1 or 2 (green)
STATUS LED (red/green)
RJ>45 Ethernet socket
Tab. 29: Meaning of the LED
displays of the FX0-GENT
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
LED
Meaning
PWR
No power supply
Green
LINK/ACT 1
LINK/ACT 2
No Ethernet connection
Green
Green
STATUS
Power supply switched on
6)
Ethernet connection active, no data transmission
Ethernet connection active, data transmission
Power-up
Green
Executing (live process data from/to FX3-CPUx)
Green
1 Hz: Idle
Red
1 Hz: Configuring/configuration required
2 Hz: Critical fault on gateway
Red
Critical fault on another module
Red/green Executing, but faulty or no Ethernet communication
Note
Error elimination is described in section 5.2.10 “Diagnostics and troubleshooting” on
page 74.
Power-up sequence
On power-up, the following LED test sequence is performed:
6)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
STATUS LED
Off for 6 s
STATUS LED
Red for 0.25 s
STATUS LED
Green for 0.25 s
STATUS LED
Off
On older versions of the FX0-GENT, the STATUS LED is called MS LED.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
53
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.2.2
Basic configuration — Assigning a device name and IP address
Configuration of the FX0-GENT is performed via the Flexi Soft Designer tool.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
EtherNet/IP gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GENT or
double click the FX0-GENT in the hardware configuration to open the gateway configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 27: EtherNet/IP gateway
configuration dialog
If desired, change the Device name for the Flexi Soft gateway.
Enter a valid IP address for the Flexi Soft gateway, and if required a valid Subnet mask
and a valid IP address for a Default gateway.
Click Connect to go online and download the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
54
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.2.3
Note
EtherNet/IP Class 1 communication — Implicit messaging
Only Flexi Soft EtherNet/IP gateways with firmware O V2.00.0 support both EtherNet/IP
implicit messaging and explicit messaging (Class 1 and Class 3). If your gateway has an
older firmware version, please refer to section 5.2.6 “Ethernet/IP Class 3 communication — Explicit messaging” on page 60. Please use the EDS file
SICK_FX0_GENT_1.00.eds for these older gateways.
General overview
Implicit messaging is a method of communication between EtherNet/IP PLCs and devices.
Implicit messaging uses Ethernet UDP messages.
Implicit messaging is cyclic in nature. Input and output data is exchanged between the
controllers and devices at regular time intervals.
Message delivery is not guaranteed.
Multicast addressing is possible.
Class 1 functionality
To establish Class 1 communication, a connection between the PLC and the EtherNet/IP
gateway must be created. To this end, the PLC must send a Forward Open message to the
gateway. The gateway then checks the received parameters, responds with a success or
fail status message (Forward Open response) and, if successful, includes a set of connection parameters.
The Forward Open message from the PLC to the EtherNet/IP gateway includes the
following parameters:
input connection type (gateway to PLC: either point-to-point or multicast)
input assembly object instance number
input data length
output connection type (PLC to gateway: only point-to-point is accepted)
output assembly object instance number (unused if input data only)
output data length (unused if input data only)
requested packet interval
The EtherNet/IP gateway then returns the following parameters in the Forward Open
response:
status of connection attempt
– SUCCESS: If the received parameters are acceptable and the gateway has sufficient
bandwidth and memory resources, the connection will be accepted. The STATUS LED
is Green.
– FAILURE: If either the received parameters are incorrect or the gateway does not
have sufficient bandwidth and memory resources, the connection will be rejected.
The STATUS LED blinks
Red/green.
The IP address and UDP socket port number on which the PLC must listen for input
messages:
– If the input connection is point-to-point, this is the PLC’s IP address.
– If the input connection is multicast, the gateway sends the multicast address on
which the PLC must listen for input messages.
The packet interval that will be allowed by the gateway. This may be the same as or
greater than the interval requested by the PLC.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
55
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Once a connection has been successfully created, data can then be exchanged between
the PLC and the EtherNet/IP gateway.
The connection will remain open until it is closed by either the PLC or the EtherNet/IP
gateway.
Packet update interval
The packet update interval for Class 1 connections that will be returned to the EtherNet/IP
PLC in the Forward Open response depends on the following factors:
the value for the Requested Packet Interval received from the EtherNet/IP PLC in the
Forward Open message
the Maximum PLC Update Rate as configured in the Gateway configuration dialog of
the Flexi Soft Designer
the 10 ms system clock that the EtherNet/IP gateway operates on
If the Requested Packet Interval is less than the Maximum PLC Update Rate, the packet
update interval will be set to the Maximum PLC Update Rate. Otherwise, it will be set to the
Requested Packet Interval.
If the packet update interval is not a multiple of 10 ms (10, 20, 30, 40, etc.), then the
packet update interval will be adjusted up to the next multiple of 10 ms.
Tab. 30: Examples for the
packet update interval
Requested
Maximum PLC
Actual packet
Packet Interval
Update Rate
update interval
5 ms
10 ms
15 ms
15 ms
10 ms
10 ms
20 ms
10 ms
10 ms
10 ms
20 ms
20 ms
20 ms
25 ms
30 ms
40 ms
32 ms
30 ms
30 ms
40 ms
40 ms
48 ms
40 ms
50 ms
50 ms
40 ms
50 ms
Description
Set to Maximum PLC Update Rate
Requested Packet Interval accepted
Set to Maximum PLC Update Rate
Requested Packet Interval adjusted
upward to 20 ms
Maximum PLC Update Rate adjusted
upward to 30 ms
Requested Packet Interval accepted
Requested Packet Interval adjusted
upward to 40 ms
Requested Packet Interval adjusted
upward to 50 ms
Requested Packet Interval accepted
Bandwidth limitations
The maximum number of Class 1 messages per second is limited by the FX3-CPUx. At 50 %
of available CPU bandwidth, this is approximately 200 messages per second or one
Class 1 connection at 10 ms I/O update rate (the system clock frequency of the FX0-GENT
is 10 ms).
Tab. 31: Recommended
bandwidths for Class 1
messages
Note
56
PLC update rate [ms]
Cyclic two-way I/O
Cyclic input-only multicast
connections
connections
10
1
2
20
2
4
40
Up to 4
Up to 8
The gateway will not enforce these bandwidth recommendations. However, if the bandwidth used for Class 1 communication exceeds 200 messages per second, the RS-232
interface and the Ethernet TCP/IP interface will slow down.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Point-to-point and multicast connections
For EtherNet/IP PLC to gateway:
Only point-to-point connections will be accepted.
Multicast connections will not be accepted.
For gateway to EtherNet/IP PLC:
Both point-to-point and multicast connections will be accepted.
Multicast connections can be either exclusive owner or multiple listeners.
Maximum number of Class 1 connections
For I/O connections involving both input and output data sets:
Each output data set can be controlled by only one I/O connection.
I/O connection attempts to control an output data set that is already controlled by
another I/O connection will be rejected.
If each I/O connection controls only one output data set, then up to 5 I/O connections
can be active simultaneously.
The maximum number of possible I/O connections decreases if an I/O connection
controls more than one output data set.
For connections involving only input data sets (gateway to PLC):
Depending on the gateway’s bandwidth, up to 32 connections may be created at one
time if all request the same set of input data.
The maximum number of connections requesting different data that can be supported
depends on the requested data rates and the available gateway bandwidth. If the connections require more bandwidth than available, the gateway will slow down and not be
able to return the input data at the requested data rates.
Class 1 data access — Input data sets
All four input data sets are included in one array that can be read by all Class 1 PLCs.
The start of the input data received by the PLC is defined by the assembly instance
number. Each input instance number corresponds to the start of an input data set.
The length determines how much input data is received by the PLC. This allows partial
and/or multiple input data sets to be received by the PLC. For example, the first
20 bytes of input data set 1 or all input data sets could be read by the PLC.
All input data sent to the PLC must be sequential. This means that input data sets 1 and
2 or input data sets 1, 2, and 3 can be sent together. However, input data sets 1 and 3
can not be sent together because they are not sequential.
Tab. 32: Class 1 read access
points to input data sets
Assembly
Byte
Length
Input
instance
index
[bytes]
data set
1
0-49
50
1
2
50-81
32
2
3
82-141
60
3
4
142-201
60
4
Description
Valid read
lengths [bytes]
Starting at input data set 1
Can read input data sets 1-4
Starting at input data set 2
Can read input data sets 2-4
Starting at input data set 3
Can read input data sets 3-4
Can read input data set 4
1-202
1-152
1-120
1-60
Class 1 data access — Output data sets
All five output data sets are included in one array that can be written by all Class 1
PLCs.
The start of the output data is defined by the assembly instance number. Each output
instance number corresponds to the start of an output data set.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
57
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
The length determines how much output data is sent by the PLC. This allows a PLC to
write to one or multiple output data sets. For example, output data set 1 or all five
output data sets could be written.
Because partial output data sets cannot be written, the output length must be a
multiple of 10 bytes. The length must be 10 to write one output data set, 20 for two
data sets, and so on.
All output data written by the PLC must be sequential. This means that e.g. output data
sets 1 and 2 or output data sets 1, 2, and 3 can be written together. However, output
data sets 1 and 3 can not be written together because they are not sequential.
Tab. 33: Class 1 write access
points to output data sets
Assembly
Byte
Length
Output
instance
index
[bytes]
data set
Description
Valid write lengths
[bytes]
5
0-9
10
1
Starting at output data set 1
Can set output data sets 1-5
6
10-19
10
2
Starting at output data set 2
Can set output data sets 2-5
7
20-29
10
3
Starting at output data set 3
Can set output data sets 3-5
8
30-39
10
4
9
40-49
10
5
Starting at output data set 4
Can set output data sets 4+5
Starting at output data set 5
Can set output data set 5
10 = Output data set 1
20 = Output data sets 1+2
30 = Output data sets 1-3
40 = Output data sets 1-4
50 = Output data sets 1-5
10 = Output data set 2
20 = Output data sets 2+3
30 = Output data sets 2-4
40 = Output data sets 2-5
10 = Output data set 3
20 = Output data sets 3+4
30 = Output data sets 3-5
10 = Output data set 4
20 = Output data sets 4+5
10 = Output data set 5
Assembly object definition
All Class 1 data must be transferred using the assembly object. The assembly object
interface is used to directly tie Vendor Specific objects to a standard interface which the
EtherNet/IP PLC uses to communicate with the device.
For the Flexi Soft EtherNet/IP gateway, the assembly object corresponds to the Full Data
Set Transfer object (72h), which provides access to the input and output data sets (see
page 65). Each instance of the assembly object corresponds to one or more Full Data Set
Transfer object attributes.
The assembly object defines the interface by which a Class 1 PLC can …
request the input data set information from the Flexi Soft gateway.
write the output data set information to the Flexi Soft gateway.
Tab. 34: Assembly object
class attributes
58
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data values
Access rule
1
Revision
UINT
1
Get
2
Max. instance
UINT
9
Get
3
Num. instances
UINT
9
Get
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 35: Assembly object
instance definitions
Assembly
Description
Data type
instance
no.
Data
Access
Corresponding
values
rule
Full Data
Transfer object
attributes
Flexi Soft to Network
1
Request input
data sets 1 to 4
data
BYTE[202]
Valid read lengths:
1-202
0-255
Get
1, 2, 3, 4
2
Request input
data sets 2 to 4
data
BYTE[152]
Valid read lengths:
1-152
0-255
Get
2, 3, 4
3
Request input
data set 3 and 4
data
BYTE[120]
Valid read lengths:
1-120
0-255
Get
3, 4
4
Request input
data set 4 data
BYTE[60]
Valid read lengths:
1-60
0-255
Get
4
Network to Flexi Soft
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
5
Write output data
set 1 to 5 data
BYTE[50]
Valid write lengths:
10 = Set 1
20 = Sets 1-2
30 = Sets 1-3
40 = Sets 1-4
50 = Sets 1-5
0-255
Get/Set
5, 6, 7, 8, 9
6
Write output data
sets 2 to 5 data
BYTE[40]
Valid write lengths:
10 = Set 2
20 = Sets 2-3
30 = Sets 2-4
40 = Sets 2-5
0-255
Get/Set
6, 7, 8, 9
7
Write output data
sets 3 to 5 data
BYTE[30]
Valid write lengths:
10 = Set 3
20 = Sets 3-4
30 = Sets 3-5
0-255
Get/Set
7, 8, 9
8
Write output data
sets 4 and 5 data
BYTE[20]
Valid write lengths:
10 = Set 4
20 = Sets 4-5
0-255
Get/Set
8, 9
9
Write output data
set 5 data
BYTE[10]
Valid write lengths:
10 = Set 5
0-255
Get/Set
9
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
59
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 36: Assembly object
instance attributes
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data values
Access rule
3
Data
Array of BYTE
0-255
Get/Set
4
Data length
UINT
Maximum
number of
bytes in
attribute 3
Get
Attribute 3 — Request/Write Data: either the readable input data or the writeable output
data, dependent on the instance number
Attribute 4 — Data length: maximum data length for each assembly instance
Common services
Tab. 37: Assembly object
common services
Service code
Implemented in class
Implemented in instance
Service name
01h
Yes
No
Get_Attributes_All
0Eh
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
10h
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
02h
No
No
Set_Attribute_All
5.2.4
Example configuration of implicit messaging with Rockwell RSLogix 5000
You will find a description of the configuration of a class 1 connection using Rockwell
RSLogix 5000 in the brochure “Flexi Soft Ethernet IP: Implicit Messaging with Rockwell
RSLogix 5000” (SICK part no. 8015359). This brochure is available for download in PDF
format at www.sick.com.
5.2.5
Example configuration of implicit messaging with an OMRON PLC
You will find a description of the configuration of a class 1 connection using an OMRON
PLC in the brochure “Flexi Soft Ethernet IP: Implicit Messaging with an Omron PLC”
(SICK part no. 8015341). This brochure is available for download in PDF format at
www.sick.com.
5.2.6
Ethernet/IP Class 3 communication — Explicit messaging
General overview
Explicit messaging is a method of communication between EtherNet/IP PLCs and devices.
Explicit messaging uses Ethernet TCP/IP messages.
Explicit messaging is not cyclic in nature. The PLC and the devices must send individual
messages to each other.
Message delivery is guaranteed.
Multicast addressing is not possible.
60
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Transfer methods
The configuration steps in this section specify how the data to the higher-level PLC are
transferred. In general, there are two different transfer methods available for both transfer
directions such as Flexi Soft to Network and Network to Flexi Soft:
Gateway writes to tag/file and/or Gateway reads from tag/file — the FX0-GENT
gateway operates as master. It writes the data into and/or reads from the PLC memory.
PLC requests and/or PLC writes — the FX0-GENT gateway operates as slave. The PLC
requests the data from the gateway and/or writes the data to the gateway.
Both methods can be mixed. E.g. it is possible to configure the gateway as master for the
Flexi Soft to Network direction (option Gateway writes to tag/file activated) while it operates at the same time as slave for the Network to Flexi Soft direction (option PLC writes
activated).
Number of possible connections
The number of possible connections to the PLC depends on whether the FX0-GENT is
operated as master or slave. Depending on the setting, up to 128 PLCs can address the
FX0-GENT at the same time.
Tab. 38: Number of possible
connections
Operating mode of the FX0-GENT
Maximum connections
Rx (To PLC) Transfer mode: Gateway writes to Tag/File
Tx (From PLC) Transfer mode: Gateway reads from Tag/File
Rx (To PLC) Transfer mode: Gateway writes to Tag/File
Tx (From PLC) Transfer mode: PLC writes
Rx (To PLC) Transfer mode: PLC requests
Tx (From PLC) Transfer mode: Gateway reads from Tag/File
Rx (To PLC) Transfer mode: PLC requests
Tx (From PLC) Transfer mode: PLC writes
Rx and Tx: 1
Rx: 1
Tx: 127
Rx: 127
Tx: 1
Rx and Tx: 128
Configuration process
The following table outlines the configuration process depending on the transfer method:
Tab. 39: Configuration guideline — Gateway as master
Gateway is master (Gateway writes to Tag/File and/or Gateway reads from Tag/File)
To do in the gateway configuration
(via Flexi Soft Designer tool)
Select which data shall be written to/read from
the PLC
Define where in the PLC memory the selected data
shall be written to: Enter tag names.
Example: InDataSet1
And/or define where in the PLC memory the selected
data shall be read from: Enter tag names.
Example: OutDataSet1
Select how often this data shall be transmitted.
Define where the data shall be read from/written to in
the EtherNet/IP network: Enter the IP address and
controller slot number of the PLC.
Tab. 40: Configuration guideline — Gateway as slave
Define exactly the same tag names in the PLC
program.
Example:
InDataSet1 INT[25]
OutDataSet1 INT[5]
The data type shall be INT.
–
–
To do in the gateway configuration
To do in the PLC program and/or EtherNet/IP
(via Flexi Soft Designer tool)
network configuration tool
–
–
–
Subject to change without notice
–
Gateway is slave (PLC requests and/or PLC writes)
–
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
To do in the PLC program and/or EtherNet/IP
network configuration tool
Download and install the FX0-GENT EDS file from
www.sick.com.
Integrate the FX0-GENT into the EtherNet/IP network
via network configuration tool (i.e. RSNetworx).
Program the explicit message “Get_Attribute_...” or
“Set_Attribute_...” in the PLC program to read/write
data from/to the gateway
Program the trigger for sending the explicit messages.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
61
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Method 1: Gateway writes to/reads from Tag/File — FX0-GENT writes the data
into/reads the data from the PLC memory
In this operating mode the FX0-GENT as a master writes the data of all activated data sets
into the specified memory areas of the PLC. The only task for the PLC programmer is to define a controller tag name which matches the gateway configuration tag name.
In order to configure the gateway to be master, perform the following steps:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
EtherNet/IP gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GENT or
double click the FX0-GENT in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 28: EtherNet/IP gateway
configuration as master
Within the Gateway configuration dialog, select the transfer method by activating Gateway writes to tag/file for the Flexi Soft to Network direction and Gateway reads from
tag/file for the Network to Flexi Soft direction.
Select which data shall be written to/read from the PLC by checking the checkbox for
the required data set.
Define where in the PLC memory the selected data shall be written to or read from:
Enter tag names into the Tag/file name edit fields (max. 20 characters).
Select Write all sets in one tag if all data sets shall be written into one tag in the PLC
memory. In this case, the tag defined for data set 1 will be used.
62
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Define how often the data shall be transmitted to the PLC:
– Select Enable COS update (update on change of state) if the FX0-GENT is to update
the data in the PLC immediately when changes occur in the data sets.
– Select Enable heartbeat interval to activate updating of the selected data sets with
the set Heartbeat rate in ms.
– Both options may be selected at the same time.
Define how often the data shall be read from the PLC:
– Enter a Heartbeat rate in ms to activate updating of the selected data sets with the
set time.
Define where the data shall be read from/written to in the EtherNet/IP network: Enter
the IP address and controller Slot number of the PLC.
Note
The configuration is considered faulty, if the PLC IP address is zero and either Gateway
writes to tag/file for the Flexi Soft to Network direction and/or Gateway reads from
tag/file for the Network to Flexi Soft direction is activated.
The Max. PLC update rate (ms) defines the maximum rate (the minimum time interval)
for transferring the data sets to and from the PLC. Settings occur dependent on the PLC
processing speed. Minimum = 10 ms, maximum = 65,535 ms. The default value of
40 ms is suitable for most PLCs.
Notes
– If the value entered for the Max. PLC update rate is greater than the Heartbeat rate
set for writing to or reading from the PLC, the heartbeat rate will be automatically
increased (i.e. slowed down) to this value.
– All data sets are transferred to the PLC in 16 bit integer format with the first byte
placed in the most significant, or leftmost byte of the integer.
Click Connect to go online and download the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Open the PLC programming tool.
Define the PLC tag names as previously configured in the Flexi Soft EtherNet/IP gateway. Fig. 29 shows an example for the definition of tag names in a PLC program written
with RSLogix:
Fig. 29: Example of tag
names in a PLC program
Notes
Tag names for Allen Bradley SLC/PLC-5 PLCs must begin with a “$” (i.e. $N10:0).
Tag names for Allen Bradley MicroLogix PLCs must begin with a “#” (i.e. #N10:0).
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
63
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Method 2: Polling mode — PLC requests the data from/PLC writes the data to the
FX0NGENT
In this operating mode the FX0RGENT operates as slave. It sends the data to the PLC upon
request and the PLC writes the data to the gateway. If this operating mode is desired:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
EtherNet/IP gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GENT or
double click the FX0-GENT in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 30: EtherNet/IP gateway
configuration as slave
Within the Gateway configuration dialog, select the transfer method by activating PLC
requests for the Flexi Soft to Network direction, PLC writes for the Network to Flexi Soft
direction.
Select which data shall be requested or written by the PLC by checking the checkboxes
for the required data sets.
Click Connect to go online and download the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Program the explicit messaging in the PLC.
Polling data sets via explicit messaging
The FX0-GENT supports two vendor specific objects which can be polled via explicit messaging:
The Full Data Set Transfer object allows to poll for each of the data sets. There is one
instance where each attribute represents a data set.
64
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
The Individual Input Data Set Transfer object allows to poll for the individual data set
parameters. There is one instance per data set and each attribute represents one byte
of the data set.
Full Data Set Transfer object definition (72h — one instance)
The vendor specific Full Data Set Transfer object defines the attributes by which the PLC
can:
request the complete input data set information from the FX0-GENT.
write the complete output data set information to the FX0-GENT.
Class attribute (instance 0)
Tab. 41: Full Data Set Transfer object (72h) class
attribute (instance 0)
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data values
Access rule
1
Revision
UINT
1
Get
2
Max. instance
UINT
1
Get
3
Num. instances
UINT
1
Get
Instance attribute (instance 1)
These attributes provide access to input and output data sets. Get Attribute Single requests for a specific input data set will return the input data set information. Get Attributes
All requests will return all enabled input data sets.
All data set information will be returned in integer (16 bit word) format. For byte data, the
first byte will be placed in the most significant or leftmost byte of the integer and the
second byte will be placed in the least significant or rightmost byte of the integer.
Tab. 42: Full Data Set Transfer object (72h) instance
attribute (instance 1)
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data values
Access rule
1
Request input data
set 1 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Get
2
Request input data
set 2 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Get
3
Request input data
set 3 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Get
4
Request input data
set 4 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Get
Flexi Soft to Network
Network to Flexi Soft
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
5
Write the output data
set 1 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Set
6
Write the output data
set 2 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Set
7
Write the output data
set 3 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Set
8
Write the output data
set 4 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Set
9
Write the output data
set 5 specific data
Array of UINT
0-255
Set
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
65
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Common services
Tab. 43: Full Data Set Transfer object (72h) common
services
Service code
Implemented in class
Implemented in instance
Service name
01h
Yes
Yes
Get_Attributes_All
0Eh
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
10h
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_Single
02h
No
Yes
Set_Attribute_All
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object definition (73h — one instance per data set)
The vendor specific Individual Input Data Set Transfer object defines the attributes by
which the PLC can request either full input data sets or individual parameters within an
input data set.
Class attributes
Tab. 44: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) class attributes
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data values
Access rule
1
Revision
UINT
1
Get
2
Max instance
UINT
4
Get
3
Num instances
UINT
4
Get
Instance attributes
Tab. 45: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance attributes
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data values
Access rule
1 to n
(dependent on
data set
definition)
Request input
data set
specific data
SINT
0-255
Get
Common services
Tab. 46: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) common services
Service code
Implemented in class
Implemented in
Service name
instance
01h
Yes
Yes
Get_Attributes_All
0Eh
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Instance attribute definitions
Attribute 1 to n — Request input data set specific parameters
These attributes return the input data set specific data arrays. Get Attribute Single requests for a specific input data set will return only the requested data set parameter information. Get Attributes All requests will return the entire data set.
The data set attributes, numbered from 1 to N, refer to each individual attribute of each
individual input data set. Each instance refers to a unique input data set and each input
data set has a unique attribute numbering scheme. The following tables reflect the attribute definitions for each input data set.
Get All Data Set Attributes request
All data set information will be returned in integer (16 bit word) format. For byte data, the
first byte will be placed in the least significant or rightmost byte of the integer and the
second byte will be placed in the most significant or leftmost byte of the integer.
66
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Example:
For an input data set, the data will be returned as follows:
– IntegerArray[0]: BBAAh
— AA = BYTE1; BB = BYTE2
– IntegerArray[1]: DDCCh
— CC = MED1; DD = MED2
– …
– IntegerArray[6]: NNMMh
Note
— MM = BYTE13; NN = BYTE14
The typical PC tools of Rockwell/Allen Bradley change this data format back to BBAA hex
format for visualisation purposes. Check your data for plausibility before putting your Flexi
Soft system into operation.
Instance 1 — Input data set 1 attribute definitions
Tab. 47: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 1 attribute
definitions
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Byte 0
SINT
2
Byte 1
SINT
…
…
…
50
Byte 49
SINT
Instance 2 — Input data set 2 attribute definitions
Tab. 48: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 2 attribute
definitions
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Total checksum
UDINT
2
Flexi Soft checksum
UDINT
3
CPU0 and CPU1: Reserved
UDINT
CPU2 and CPU3: ACR checksum
4
Reserved
UDINT
5
Reserved
UDINT
6
Reserved
UDINT
7
Reserved
UDINT
8
Reserved
UDINT
Instance 3 — Input data set 3 attribute definitions
Tab. 49: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 3 attribute
definitions
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Module status module 0
UINT[2]
2
Module status module 1
UINT[2]
…
…
…
15
Module status module 14
UINT[2]
Instance 4 — Input data set 4 attribute definitions
Tab. 50: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 4 attribute
definitions
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Reserved
UINT[2]
2
Reserved
UINT[2]
…
…
…
15
Reserved
UINT[2]
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
67
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
PLC-5/SLC/MicroLogix interface
The PLC-5, SLC and MicroLogix PLC interfaces are supported by:
the same write to PLC functionality as provided to ControlLogix PLCs provided in the
Write-to-File receive method.
PCCC based messages transferred via the PCCC object
– SLC Typed Read Message
– SLC Typed Write Message
– PLC-5 Typed Read Message (Logical ASCII and Logical Binary address format)
– PLC-5 Typed Write Message (Logical ASCII and Logic binary address format).
Normal PLC-5/SLC file naming conventions are used.
The primary differences between the PLC-5/SLC/MicroLogix interface and the ControlLogix
interfaces are:
Polling is performed through the SLC and PLC-5 specific messages instead of accessing
the Data Transfer object.
Data is written into files on the PLC, instead of tags as on ControlLogix PLCs.
Note
While ControlLogix PLCs support the SLC and PLC-5 messages, using those messages on
ControlLogix PLCs is not recommended due to data size and performance considerations.
Receive communication methods
Polling Receive Method
This method provides a polling method that allows the PLC to request data on a periodic
basis.
In this method, the input data set information is returned in the response to the data request message. The PLC requests data by accessing the corresponding data file
address on the FX0-GENT with either a SLC typed read or PLC-5 typed read message.
The following restrictions apply to this method:
– The file location to receive the input data set on the PLC must be of type INTEGER
and large enough to contain the input data set table(s).
– If no data has been received on the FLEXBUS+ for the specified module, all zeros will
be returned.
Unsolicited — Write to File Receive Method
When it is determined that data received on the Flexi Soft gateway’s FLEXBUS+ interface is to be sent to the PLC, the data is immediately written to a file location on the
PLC.
The following restrictions apply to this method:
– The Receive Data Area File Name must have the same name as the file defined on
the PLC. For SLC and PLC-5 PLCs, all file names must be configured with a preceding
“$” (i.e $N10:0). For MicroLogix PLCs, all file names must be configured with a
preceding “#” (i.e # N10:0).
– The file on the PLC must be of type INTEGER and must be large enough to contain
the input data set table(s).
– Data will be written with the first byte placed in the MS byte location of the integer.
Example: aabb, ccdd, eeff, etc. where aa = byte 1, bb = byte 2, cc = byte 3, etc.
68
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Transmit (From PLC) Data Transfer Methods
The FX0-GENT will support the following methods of receiving or retrieving the output data
set(s) from the PLC.
PLC Writes Method
This is the standard method where the PLC uses a message instruction to write the
output data sets to the FX0-GENT. With this method, the output data sets can be
updated via a PCCC message written to the corresponding file/address location on the
FX0RGENT.
Read-from-File Transmit Method (Poll the PLC)
With this method, the FX0-GENT will monitor the configured PLC memory location for
changes to the output data set(s). When a change is detected, the output data sets will
be processed accordingly.
The following restrictions apply to this method:
– The output data set file locations must be of INTEGER (16 bit word) format and must
be of sufficient length to contain the entire output data set.
– Data in the INTEGER file must be formatted with the first byte placed in the MS byte
location.
Example: aabb, ccdd, eeff, etc. where aa = byte 1, bb = byte 2, cc = byte 3, etc.
PLC-5 and SLC Messages
The following PCCC messages are supported for the PLC-5, SLC and MicroLogix PLCs:
Tab. 51: Supported PCCC
messages for the PLC-5, SLC
and MicroLogix PLCs
Message type
PCCC message
Maximum message size
SLC Typed Read
162
CLX: 242 SINTs (121 INTs)
SLC: 206 SINTs (103 INTs)
SLC Typed Write
170
CLX: 220 SINTs (110 INTs)
SLC: 206 SINTs (103 INTs)
PLC-5 Typed Read
104
CLX: 234 SINTs (117 INTs)
SLC: 252 SINTs (126 INTs)
PLC-5 Typed Write
103
CLX: 226 SINTs (113 INTs)
SLC: 226 SINTs (113 INTs)
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Both the PLC-5 and SLC Typed Read message can be used to retrieve all input data sets.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
69
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 52: Addressing for the
PLC-5/SLC messages
Address
Description
Access rule
Data size [words]
N10:0
All enabled input data sets data
Get
16-101
N11:0
Request input data set 1 data
Get
25
N12:0
Request input data set 2 data
Get
16
N13:0
Request input data set 3 data
Get
30
N14:0
Request input data set 4 data
Get
30
N20:0
Write all enabled output data sets
Set
5-25
N21:0
Write output data set 1 data
Set
5
N22:0
Write output data set 2 data
Set
5
N23:0
Write output data set 3 data
Set
5
N24:0
Write output data set 4 data
Set
5
N25:0
Write output data set 5 data
Set
5
7)
8)
PLC-5/SLC Receive Data Message
The Receive Input Data Set Message format is as defined for each individual input data
set. Please refer to section 3.3 “Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)” on
page 14 for further details.
PCCC object (67h — 1 instance)
The PCCC object provides the ability to encapsulate and then transmit and receive PCCC
messages between devices on an EtherNet/IP network. This object is used to communicate to SLC 5/05 and PLC-5 PLCs over EtherNet/IP.
Class attributes
Not supported.
Instance attributes
Not supported.
Instances
Supports instance 1.
Common services
Tab. 53: PCCC object (67h)
common services
7)
8)
70
Service code
Implemented in
class
Implemented in
instance
Service name
4Bh
No
Yes
Execute_PCCC
Will correspond to all enabled input data sets.
Must correspond to all enabled output data sets. Example: If only output data sets 1 and 2 are enabled, then
10 words (20 bytes) must be written. If all output data sets are enabled, then 25 words (50 bytes) must be
written.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Message structure for Execute_PCCC
Tab. 54: PCCC object (67h)
request message
Tab. 55: PCCC object (67h)
response message
Tab. 56: PCCC object (67h)
supported PCCC command
types
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Name
Data type
Description
Length
USINT
Length of requestor ID
Vendor
UINT
Vendor number of requestor
Serial number
UDINT
ASA serial number of requestor
CMD
USINT
Command byte
STS
USINT
0
TNSW
UINT
Transport word
FNC
USINT
Function code
PCCC_params
Array of USINT
CMD/FMC specific parameters
Name
Data type
Description
Length
USINT
Length of requestor ID
Vendor
UINT
Vendor number of requestor
Serial number
UDINT
ASA serial number of requestor
CMD
USINT
Command byte
STS
USINT
Status byte
TNSW
UINT
Transport word. Same value as request
EXT_STS
USINT
Extended status (if error)
PCCC_params
Array of USINT
CMD/FMC specific result data
CMD
FNC
Description
0Fh
67h
PLC-5 write
0Fh
68h
PLC-5 read
0Fh
A2h
SLC 500 protected read with 3 address fields
0Fh
AAh
SLC 500 protected write with 3 address fields
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
71
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.2.7
Example for the configuration of explicit messaging
This section gives an example how to configure explicit messaging using RSLogix.
Required gateway settings
In the Gateway configuration dialog of the Flexi Soft Designer, the following settings have
to be activated:
PLC requests
PLC writes
Required RSLogix settings
In RSLogix, the following settings must be made:
PLC is Active (explicit messaging enabled)
128 connections possible
Each Data Set must have the correct size.
Main program sends a message with command to SET or GET (either
Get_Attribute_Single or Get_Attributes_All, see Tab. 46).
Step 1:
Create two tags. One for the MESSAGE and one to store the data from the GET
command.
The MESSAGE tag will be for the MSG block which is used for explicit messaging. The MSG
command in this example will request Data Set 1. The received Data Set 1 will then be
placed into a tag of our choosing, called “WhatIWant”.
Note
The destination tag must be set to the size of the Data Set. In this case, it would be 50
bytes or INT[25].
Fig. 31: Creating tags for
explicit messaging
Step 2:
On one line in the program, create a NOT connected to the MSG command
Fig. 32: Main routine programming for explicit
messaging
Select “message.EN” for the NOT symbol. This ensures that the message will be
requested repeatedly.
72
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Step 3:
Edit the message command as follows:
– Configuration: Select CIP Generic. The Class describes the object. Class 72 is for
Full Data Set Transfer. Instance 1 and Attribute 1 determine the data type which in
this case is Data Set 1 (see Tab. 42). As Destination the “WhatIWant” tag must be
chosen.
Fig. 33: Explicit messaging —
Message configuration
– Communication: The message has to contain the Path to the gateway. In this
example the path is 10.4.209.51.
Fig. 34: Explicit messaging —
Communication configuration
5.2.8
TCP/IP configuration interface
See section 5.1.1 “TCP/IP configuration interface” on page 32.
5.2.9
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface
See section 5.1.2 “Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface” on page 37.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
73
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.2.10
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
For information how to perform diagnostics on the Flexi Soft system please refer to the
operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK part no. 8012998).
Tab. 57: Troubleshooting for
the FX0-GENT
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
The Flexi Soft Designer tool
does not connect to the Flexi
Soft gateway module
FX0-GENT has no power supply.
FX0-GENT is not in the same
physical network as the PC.
The PC is configured to another
subnet mask in the TCP/IP settings.
FX0-GENT has already been configured once and has a fixed set IP
address or an IP address assigned
by a DHCP server that is not
recognised.
FX0-GENT is configured for data
transfer to PLC, but Ethernet
communication is not yet
established or faulty.
Duplicate IP address detected.
Another device on the network has
the same IP address.
Establish the power supply.
Check the Ethernet wiring and network
settings on the PC and correct if
necessary.
Set the subnet mask on the PC to
255.255.0.0 (factory setting of the
FX0RGENT).
Check the communication settings in
the Flexi Soft Designer.
FX0-GENT does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS9)
Red/green
FX0-GENT does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS9)
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GENT does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS9) Green
FX0-GENT does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS9)
Green (1 Hz)
FX0-GENT functioned correctly
after configuration, but
suddenly no longer supplies
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS9)
Red/green
FX0-GENT/Flexi Soft system is
in Critical fault mode.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT
Green
STATUS9) Red
FX0-GENT is in Critical fault
mode.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS9)
Red (2 Hz)
9)
74
Configuration required.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Minimum one Ethernet connection
needs to be established. Set up
Ethernet connection on PLC side, check
Ethernet cabling, check Ethernet
connection settings on PLC and in the
Flexi Soft Designer. If no Ethernet
communication is required, disable the
Ethernet connections/PLC interfaces on
the FX0-GENT.
Adjust IP address and power cycle
device.
Configure the FX0-GENT and download
the configuration to the device.
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
No data set is activated.
No Ethernet communication
interface is enabled.
Activate at least one data set.
FX0-GENT is in Idle mode.
CPU/application is stopped. Start CPU
(change into Run state) .
FX0-GENT is operated in slave
mode, the IP address is assigned
from a DHCP server. After the FX0GENT or the DHCP server has been
restarted, a different IP address
that is unknown to the PLC has
been assigned to the FX0-GENT.
FX0-GENT is not plugged properly
into the other Flexi Soft module.
Module connecting plug is soiled or
damaged.
Other Flexi Soft module has
internal critical error.
FX0-GENT internal device error
CPU firmware version does not
support Flexi Soft gateways.
Either assign a fixed IP address to the
FX0-GENT, or reserve a fixed IP address
for the FX0-GENT in the DHCP server
(manual assignment by means of the
MAC address of the FX0-GENT).
Plug the FX0-GENT in correctly.
Clean the connecting socket/plug.
Repower the system.
Check the other Flexi Soft modules.
Switch off the power supply of the Flexi
Soft system and switch it on again.
Check the diagnostics messages with
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Use a FX3-CPUx with the required
firmware version (see section 2.2
“Correct use” on page 10).
If the error remains, replace the
gateway.
On older versions of the FX0-GENT, the STATUS LED is called MS LED.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.3
Modbus TCP gateway
The following Flexi Soft gateway can be used for Modbus/TCP: FX0-GMOD.
The Flexi Soft Modbus TCP gateway supports:
Modbus TCP master and slave receive methods
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface, polling and auto update function
With firmware O V2.01.0: Data can be read also wordwise.
5.3.1
Interfaces and operation
The FX0-GMOD is equipped with an integrated three-port switch for connection with the
Ethernet network. Two RJ-45 sockets are available for the connection. The switch functionality allows the FX0-GMOD to be used for connection to another Ethernet component (e.g.
connection to a notebook) without having to interrupt the Ethernet connection to the
network.
Fig. 35: Interfaces and display elements of the
FX0>GMOD
RJ>45 Ethernet socket
LED power supply (green)
LED network activity for Ethernet
port 1 or 2 (green)
LED MS (red/green)
RJ>45 Ethernet socket
Tab. 58: Meaning of the LED
displays
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
LED
Meaning
PWR
No power supply
Green
LINK/ACT 1
LINK/ACT 2
Power supply switched on
No Ethernet connection
Green
Green
MS
Ethernet connection active, no data transmission
Ethernet connection active, data transmission
Power-up
Green
Executing (live process data from/to FX3-CPUx)
Green
1 Hz: Idle
Red
1 Hz: Configuring/configuration required
2 Hz: Critical fault on gateway
Red
Critical fault on another module
Red/green Executing, but Ethernet communication not established
or faulty
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Error elimination is described in section 5.3.6 “Diagnostics and troubleshooting” on
page 83.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
75
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Power-up sequence
On power-up, the following LED test sequence is performed:
MS LED
Off for 6 s
MS LED
Red for 0.25 s
MS LED
Green for 0.25 s
MS LED
Off
5.3.2
Basic configuration — Assigning an IP address
Configuration of the FX0-GMOD is performed via the Flexi Soft Designer tool.
Via Flexi Soft Designer tool
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the Modbus
TCP gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GMOD or
double click the FX0-GMOD in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 36: Modbus TCP gateway
configuration dialog
Enter a valid IP address, Subnet mask and if required a valid IP address for a Default
gateway.
Click OK.
Click Connect to go online and download the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
76
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.3.3
Configuration of the Modbus TCP interface to the PLC — How the data are
transferred
Modbus TCP application characteristics:
support of standard Modbus TCP addressing conventions
Master and Slave receive methods
Modbus TCP PLC requirements:
The PLC must support the Modbus TCP protocol.
The PLC must support the Read Holding Registers and Write Multiple Registers
commands or, alternatively, the Read/Write Multiple Registers command.
The configuration steps in this section specify how the data to the higher-level PLC are
transferred.
In general, there are two different transfer methods available for each transfer direction
such as Flexi Soft to Network and Network to Flexi Soft:
Polling receive method/PLC requests (gateway as slave)
This method provides a polling method that allows the PLC to request data on a periodic
basis. In this method, the data is returned in the response to the data request message.
The PLC requests data by accessing the receive data address on the FX0-GMOD module
with a Read Holding Registers message.
Master receive method — Gateway writes to PLC (auto-update, gateway as master)
When it is determined that data received on the FX0-GMOD module backplane interface
is to be sent to the PLC, the data is immediately written to a data memory location on
the PLC.
Slave transmit method — PLC writes (gateway as slave)
In this method, the PLC will send write messages to the FX0-GMOD module to set the
output data sets. To write to the output data sets, the PLC writes the data to specified
addresses.
Master transmit method — Gateway reads from PLC (auto-update, gateway as master)
In the master transmit mode, the FX0-GMOD module will poll the PLC for the output
data set settings.
Note
The configuration is considered faulty, if the PLC IP address is zero and either the Read
Transfer mode and/or the Write Transfer mode is set to Master.
The number of possible connections to the PLC depends on whether the FX0-GMOD is
operated as a master or slave. Depending on the setting, up to 32 PLCs can address the
FX0-GMOD at the same time.
Tab. 59: Number of possible
connections
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating mode of the FX0-GMOD
Maximum connections
Rx (To PLC) transfer mode: Master
Tx (From PLC) transfer mode: Master
Rx (To PLC) transfer mode: Master
Tx (From PLC) transfer mode: Slave
Rx (To PLC) transfer mode: Slave
Tx (From PLC) transfer mode: Master
Rx (To PLC) transfer mode: Slave
Tx (From PLC) transfer mode: Slave
Rx and Tx: 1
Rx: 1
Tx: 31
Rx: 31
Tx: 1
Rx and Tx: 32
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
77
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
The following table outlines a guideline to the configuration process depending on the
transfer method:
Tab. 60: Configuration guideline — Gateway as master
Gateway is master
To do in the gateway configuration (via Flexi
To do in the PLC program and/or Modbus TCP
Soft Designer tool)
network configuration tool
Select Gateway writes to tag/file and/or Gateway
reads from register to configure gateway as master.
Select which data shall be written to/read from
the PLC
Define where in the PLC memory the selected data
shall be written to: Enter holding register address(es).
Example: “400001”
And/or define where in the PLC memory the selected
data shall be read from: Enter holding register
addresses.
Select how often this data shall be transmitted.
Define where the data shall be read from/written to in
the Modbus TCP network: Enter the IP address and
controller slot number of the PLC.
Tab. 61: Configuration guideline — Gateway as slave
78
–
Ensure the addresses defined in the Flexi Soft
Designer configuration are available and contain the
data determined for the Flexi Soft system.
Note: Modbus TCP communication uses port 502 as
standard port.
–
–
Gateway is slave
To do in the gateway configuration (via Flexi
Soft Designer tool)
To do in the PLC program and/or Modbus TCP
network configuration tool
Select PLC requests and PLC writes in the gateway
configuration dialog
–
–
Note
–
Define which data shall be written to/read from the
gateway.
Ensure the PLC program writes the data into the
addresses defined for the gateway (see Tab. 62 on
page 82).
The Modbus TCP gateway address setting is based 1. Please add 1 to the holding register
address set in the Flexi Soft Designer for an address setting based 0.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Master mode — FX0-GMOD reads from/writes to the PLC
In order to configure the gateway to be master, perform the following steps:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the Modbus
TCP gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GMOD or
double click the FX0-GMOD in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 37: Modbus TCP gateway
configuration as master
Within the Gateway configuration dialog, select the transfer method by checking
Gateway writes to tag/file for the Flexi Soft to Network direction and Gateway reads
from register for the Network to Flexi Soft direction.
Select which data shall be written to/read from the PLC by checking the checkbox for
the required data set. For the exact description of the data sets please refer to section 3.3 “Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)” on page 14.
Define where in the PLC memory the selected data shall be written to or read from:
Enter addresses into the Holding register address field (max. 20 characters).
Select Write all sets in one tag if all data sets shall be written into one address in the
PLC memory. In this case, the tag/file defined for data set 1 will be used.
For the Flexi Soft to network direction, define how often the data shall be transmitted:
– Select Enable COS update if the FX0-GMOD is to update the data in the PLC
immediately when changes occur in the data sets.
– Select Enable heartbeat interval to activate updating of the selected data sets with
the set Heartbeat rate.
Both options may be selected at the same time.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
79
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
For the Network to Flexi Soft direction, define how often the data shall be read:
– Enter a Heartbeat rate to activate updating of the selected data sets with the set
time interval.
Define where the data shall be read from/written to in the Modbus TCP network: Enter
the PLC IP address and the Modbus Device ID of the PLC.
Max. PLC update rate defines the maximum rate (the minimum time interval) for sending the data sets to the PLC. Settings occur dependent on the PLC processing speed.
Minimum = 10 ms, maximum = 65,535 ms. The default value of 40 ms is suitable for
most PLCs.
Note
If this value is greater than the Heartbeat rate, the heartbeat rate is slowed down to
this value.
Go online and download the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Write to PLC
Note
The following restrictions apply when the gateway is master and writes the input data sets
to the PLC:
The input data set address (set via Flexi Soft Designer Tool) must be the same as that
defined on the PLC.
The variable to receive the data on the PLC must be:
– in the 40xxxx address range (for Schneider Modicon type PLCs)
– an array of 16 bit words
– long enough to contain the specified input data set array.
All input data sets are transferred to the PLC in 16 bit word format with the first byte
placed in the least significant, or rightmost byte of the integer and the second byte
placed in the most significant, or leftmost byte of the integer.
Read from PLC
Note
The following restrictions apply when the gateway is master and reads the output data sets
from the PLC:
The output data set addresses must be the same as those defined on the PLC.
The variables to request the data on the PLC must be:
– in the 40xxxx address range (for Schneider Modicon type PLCs)
– for the output data set settings, an array of 16 bit words long enough to contain the
entire output data set.
All output data sets are transferred from the PLC in 16 bit word format and the first byte
must be placed in the least significant, or rightmost byte of the integer and the second
byte placed in the most significant, or leftmost byte of the integer.
Slave mode — PLC reads from/writes to the FX0-GMOD
In this operating mode the FX0-GMOD sends the data as slave upon request from the PLC.
If this operating mode is desired:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the Modbus
TCP gateway.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GMOD or
double click the FX0-GMOD in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
80
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 38: Modbus TCP gateway
configuration as slave
Within the Gateway configuration dialog, select the transfer method by checking PLC
requests for the Flexi Soft to Network direction and PLC writes for the Network to Flexi
Soft direction.
Select which data shall be written/read to/from the PLC by checking the checkbox for
the required data set. For the exact description of the data sets please refer to section
3.3 “Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)” on page 14.
Click OK.
Go online and download the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
PLC writes output data sets
The following restrictions apply when the PLC writes the output data sets:
The device index must be 1.
The message must be sent in word format.
All output data sets are transferred from the PLC in 16 bit word format and the first byte
must be placed in the least significant, or rightmost byte of the integer and the second
byte placed in the most significant, or leftmost byte of the integer.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
81
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
PLC polls input data sets
The following restrictions apply to this method:
The device index must be 1.
The variable to receive the data on the PLC must be:
– in the 40xxxx address range (for Schneider Modicon type PLCs)
– an array of 16 bit words
– long enough to contain the data set array(s)
All input data sets are transferred to the PLC in 16 bit word format with the first byte
placed in the least significant, or rightmost byte of the integer and the second byte
placed in the most significant, or leftmost byte of the integer.
FX0-GMOD as slave — Data addressing
The following table lists the address to read out the data sets.
Tab. 62: Data addressing for
FX0-GMOD as receiver
Unit ID
Address (Base 1)
1
Description
Access
Scope
[words]
Note
Request all enabled input data sets
Get
16-101
1100
Request input data set 1 data
Get
25
1200
Request input data set 2 data
Get
16
1300
Request input data set 3 data
Get
30
1400
Request input data set 4 data
Get
30
2000
Write all enabled output data sets data
Set
5-25
2100
Write output data set 1 data
Set
5
2200
Write output data set 2 data
Set
5
2300
Write output data set 3 data
Set
5
2400
Write output data set 4 data
Set
5
2500
Write output data set 5 data
Set
5
11)
All data sets can only be read or written as a block. It is not possible to read or write single
bits or bytes.
10)
11)
82
10)
1000
Will correspond to all enabled input data sets.
Must correspond to all enabled output data sets. Example: If only output data sets 1 and 2 are enabled, then
10 words (20 bytes) must be written. If all output data sets are enabled, then 25 words (50 bytes) must be
written.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Modbus commands and error messages
The FX0-GMOD supports the following Modbus commands and error messages:
Tab. 63: Modbus commands
Tab. 64: Modbus error
messages
Modbus command
Value
Read holding registers
3
Write multiple registers
16 (10h)
Read/write multiple registers
23 (17h)
Modbus error response
Description
1 Illegal function
The requested function is not supported
2 Illegal data address
Undefined data address received
3 Illegal data value
Request with illegal data values, for example not
enough data requested for a data set
10 Gateway paths not available
Invalid configuration, for example polling or
setting of the digital outputs via PLC during
operation of the FX0-GMOD in master mode
5.3.4
TCP/IP configuration interface
See section 5.1.1 “TCP/IP configuration interface” on page 32.
5.3.5
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface
See section 5.1.2 “Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface” on page 37.
5.3.6
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
For information how to perform diagnostics on the Flexi Soft system please refer to the
operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK part no. 8012998).
Tab. 65: Troubleshooting for
the FX0-GMOD
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Error
Possible cause
FX0-GMOD has no power supply.
FX0-GMOD is not in the same
physical network as the PC.
The PC is configured to another
subnet mask in the TCP/IP settings.
FX0-GMOD has already been
configured once and has a fixed set
IP address or an IP address
assigned by a DHCP server that is
not recognised.
FX0-GMOD does not supply any FX0-GMOD is configured for data
transfer to PLC, but Ethernet
data.
communication is not yet
PWR Green
established or faulty.
LINK/ACT /
Green
MS
Red/green
Duplicate IP address detected.
Another device on the network has
the same IP address.
The Flexi Soft Designer tool
does not connect to the Flexi
Soft gateway module
Possible remedy
Establish the power supply.
Check the Ethernet wiring and network
settings on the PC and correct if
necessary.
Set the subnet mask on the PC to
255.255.0.0 (factory setting of the
FX0RGMOD).
Check the communication settings in
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Minimum one Ethernet connection
needs to be established. Set up
Ethernet connection on PLC side, check
Ethernet cabling, check Ethernet
connection settings on PLC and in the
Flexi Soft Designer. If no Ethernet
communication is required, disable the
Ethernet connections/PLC interfaces on
the FX0-GMOD.
Adjust IP address and power cycle
device.
For Modbus TCP communication check
the Modbus port number at the PLC
(the Modbus port number must be
502). Do not confuse the Modbus port
number with the TCP/IP socket port
number which must be > 1023.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
83
Chapter 5
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
FX0-GMOD does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
MS
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GMOD does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
MS Green
FX0-GMOD does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
MS
Green (1 Hz)
FX0-GMOD functioned correctly
after configuration, but
suddenly no longer supplies
data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
MS
Red/green
Configuration required.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Configure the FX0-GMOD and download
the configuration to the device.
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
No data set is activated.
No Ethernet communication
interface is enabled.
Activate at least one data set.
FX0-GMOD is in Idle mode.
CPU/application is stopped. Start CPU
(change into Run state) .
FX0-GMOD is operated in slave
mode, the IP address is assigned
from a DHCP server. After the FX0GMOD or the DHCP server has
been restarted, a different IP
address that is unknown to the PLC
has been assigned to the FX0GMOD.
FX0-GMOD is not plugged properly
into the other Flexi Soft module.
Module connecting plug is soiled or
damaged.
Other Flexi Soft module has
internal critical error.
FX0-GMOD internal device error
CPU firmware version does not
support Flexi Soft gateways.
Either assign a fixed IP address to the
FX0RGMOD, or reserve a fixed IP
address for the FX0-GMOD in the DHCP
server (manual assignment by means
of the MAC address of the FX0-GMOD).
FX0-GMOD/Flexi Soft system is
in Critical fault mode.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT
Green
MS Red
FX0-GMOD is in Critical fault
mode.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
MS
Red (2 Hz)
5.4
Plug the FX0-GMOD in correctly.
Clean the connecting socket/plug.
Repower the system.
Check the other Flexi Soft modules.
Switch off the power supply of the Flexi
Soft system and switch it on again.
Check the diagnostics messages with
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Use a FX3-CPUx with the required
firmware version (see section 2.2
“Correct use” on page 10).
If the error remains, replace the
gateway.
PROFINET IO gateway
The following Flexi Soft gateway can be used for PROFINET IO: FX0-GPNT.
You will find the GSDML file and device icon for PLC interfacing with PROFIBUS support …
in the Internet on the FX0-GPNT product page on www.sick.com.
in the Flexi Soft Designer program folder on your hard disk (default installation folder is
“C:\programs\SICK\FlexiSoft\DeviceDescriptions\...”).
The FX0-GPNT supports
84
PROFINET IO conformance class A
Fast integrated switching
LLDP
Auto-MDI
SNMP
Auto negotiation
MIB II
Cyclic I/O communication
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.4.1
Interfaces and operation
The FX0-GPNT is equipped with an integrated 3-port switch for connection with the Ethernet network. Two RJ-45 sockets are available for the connection. The switch functionality
allows the FX0-GPNT to be used for connection to another Ethernet component (e.g. connection to a notebook) without having to interrupt the Ethernet connection to the network.
Fig. 39: Interfaces and
display elements of the
FX0>GPNT
RJ>45 Ethernet socket
LED power supply (green)
LED network activity for Ethernet
port 1 or 2 (green)
LED STATUS (red/green)
RJ>45 Ethernet socket
Tab. 66: Meaning of the LED
displays of the FX0-GPNT
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
LED
Meaning
PWR
No power supply
Green
LINK/ACT 1
LINK/ACT 2
Power supply switched on
No Ethernet connection
Green
Green
STATUS
Ethernet connection active, no data transmission
Ethernet connection active, data transmission
Power-up
Green
Green
Executing (live process data from/to FX3-CPUx)
1 Hz: Idle
2 Hz: PROFINET master requested LED flashing for
physical device identification
Red
1 Hz: Configuring/configuration required
2 Hz: Critical fault on gateway
Red
Critical fault on another module
Red/green Executing, but Ethernet communication not established
or faulty (can be switched off, see below)
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Error elimination is described in section 5.4.7 “Diagnostics and troubleshooting” on
page 100.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
85
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Disabling the STATUS LED for PROFINET communication
With firmware O V2.00.0 the red/green flashing of the STATUS LED can be disabled in the
Flexi Soft Designer. Otherwise the LED will flash permanently if no PROFINET communication is established (e.g. if the gateway is used for TCP/IP communication only).
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GPNT or
double click the FX0-GPNT in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. On the right side of the window
you will find the following configuration panel:
Fig. 40: Disabling the STATUS
LED of the FX0-GPNT
Activate the checkbox. After downloading the configuration, the LED will light up
Green permanently, even if no PROFINET communication is established.
Note
This feature is only available with firmware O V2.00.0 and Flexi Soft Designer version
O 1.4.0.
Power-up sequence
On power-up, the following LED test sequence is performed:
STATUS LED
Off for 6 s
STATUS LED
Red for 0.25 s
STATUS LED
Green for 0.25 s
STATUS LED
Off
5.4.2
Basic configuration — Assigning a device name and IP address
Configuration and diagnostic of the FX0-GPNT may be performed via the Flexi Soft Designer tool as well as with the PROFINET IO network programming tool (e.g. SIEMENS
SIMATIC).
Configuration via PROFINET IO
In the out-of-the-box configuration, each PROFINET IO field device, e.g. the FX0-GPNT has a
MAC address and a symbolic name stored.
Notes
The symbolic name for the gateway is FX0-GPNT.
This name is used by the I/O controller (i.e. PLC) to assign the IP address to the field
device.
If the IP address is also used for other Ethernet communications like TCP/IP or configuration over Ethernet, remember that the PLC can change the IP address so these can be
interupted.
86
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Address assignment is performed in two steps.
Assign a unique plant specific name to the gateway by using either the network configuration tool, e.g. SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager or the Flexi Soft Designer tool.
Using the plant specific (unique) name, the I/O controller (i.e. PLC) can now assign the
IP address to the gateway before system boot.
Note
The FX0-GPNT MAC address is printed on the device type label
(example: 00:06:77:02:00:A7).
Device name set via SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager
Refer to section “Step 4: Assign the device name” on page 91.
Device name set via Flexi Soft Designer
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
PROFINET IO gateway. Ensure your project is offline.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GPNT or
double click the FX0-GPNT in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 41: PROFINET IO gateway configuration dialog
Enter the device name in the Device name field (maximum length 255 characters).
Notes
The device name format must apply to the PROFINET standard specification.
Ensure that the default gateway address corresponds to the address set by the PLC for
the gateway. If there is no router used, Siemens Step 7 uses as default gateway
address the same address as the IP address for the GPNT.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
87
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
IP address set via Flexi Soft Designer tool
Usually the IP address will be assigned by the PROFINET IO controller (e.g. PLC). However,
the FX0-GPNT allows configuration of the entire Flexi Soft system over Ethernet TCP/IP. In
this case, it may be necessary to assign an IP address to the gateway even before the
PROFINET IO network has been setup. This can be done on the configuration page shown
in Fig. 41 as well.
5.4.3
PROFINET configuration of the gateway — How the data are transferred
The following steps need to be taken in order to configure the communication between
PLC and gateway.
Note
This document does not cover the creation of the PROFINET IO network or the rest of the
automation system project in the network configuration tool. It is assumed the PROFINET
project has already been set up in the configuration program, e.g. SIEMENS SIMATIC
Manager. Examples refer to configurations performed with SIEMENS SIMATIC manager.
Step 1: Install the generic station description file (GSDML file)
Before the FX0-GPNT can be used as device in the network configuration tool, e.g.
SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager, for the first time, the generic station description (GSDML) of
the gateway must be installed into the hardware catalogue of the tool.
Download the GSDML file and device icon from www.sick.com, on the FX0RGPNT
product page.
Follow the instructions in the online help or in the user manual of the PROFINET network
configuration tool for installing generic station description files.
Using the SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager — HW Config, the gateway then appears in the hardware catalogue under >>PROFINET IO > Additional Field Devices > Gateway > FlexiSoft.
88
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Step 2: Add the gateway to the project
In order to have the Flexi Soft system data available in the PLC process image, the gateway must be added to the hardware configuration first. The procedure associated with this
depends on the hardware configuration program of the PLC being used. On this topic,
please also read the documentation for the corresponding program.
The example below shows how to add the gateway to a SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager
project.
In the SIEMENS SIMATIC Hardware Manager, the gateway can be found in the hardware
catalogue under >>PROFINET IO > Additional Field Devices > Gateway > FlexiSoft.
Drag & drop the device into the Ethernet PROFINET IO network. Example:
Fig. 42: PROFINET IO gateway in the PROFINET IO
HW Config
After adding the device to the automation network it is required to configure which of the
cyclic data blocks will be used and where they will be addressed in memory. For details
refer to section 5.4.4 “PROFINET configuration of the gateway — Which data are transferred” on page 92.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
89
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Step 3: Configure the properties of the gateway
Double click on the gateway hardware symbol.
Configure the update time of the cyclic I/O data exchange. To do this click on the
IO cycle tab and select the desired rate from the Update time pull-down menu.
Fig. 43: Configuration of the
update time of the FX0-GPNT
90
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Step 4: Assign the device name
In order for the PLC to communicate with the FX0-GPNT, the PLC software and the gateway
must agree on the name of the gateway.
Specify the gateway’s PROFINET IO device name
Double click on the gateway hardware symbol.
Select the General tab.
Enter the desired device name in the dialog as shown below:
Fig. 44: Properties dialog of
the FX0-GPNT
Note
The device name format shall apply to the PROFINET standard specification.
Assign the device name to the gateway.
Select PLC > Ethernet > Assign device name. The Assign device name dialog opens.
From the Assign device name dialog, find and select the SICK gateway that you wish to
assign the device name to in the list.
Click the Assign name button.
Fig. 45: Assign device name
dialog for the FX0-GPNT
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
91
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.4.4
PROFINET configuration of the gateway — Which data are transferred
Cyclic data
The physical Flexi Soft I/O modules are not represented as typical hardware modules in
the PROFINET IO hardware catalogue. Instead, the data available from the Flexi Soft system has been organized into data blocks. Each data block represents a “hardware” module in the PROFINET IO hardware catalogue. The Flexi Soft PROFINET IO gateway GSDML
supports ten (10) slots (see Fig. 46: Projecting the FX0RGPNT) where the modules can be
placed into. This allows each data block to be mapped once.
Process data from the Flexi Soft system to the PLC
The FX0-GPNT provides 5 input data blocks (virtual I/O device modules) containing the
process image. These must be projected in a hardware configurator (e.g. SIEMENS HW
Config) in natural order (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). No other sequence is possible.
Notes
Depending on the type of PLC used, further modules may be displayed (e.g.“universal
module”). These modules are not needed and should be ignored.
The input data blocks 1-4 contain 12 bytes each, input data block 5 contains 2 bytes.
The contents of the input data blocks are freely selectable, but are preconfigured in the
Flexi Soft Designer configuration software:
Tab. 67: Default content of
input data block 1-5 of the
FX0>GPNT
Data block 1
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
Length
Data block 2
Data block 3
Data block 4
Data block 5
Input data
Input data
Input data
Logic result 0
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 1
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 2
Not assigned
Logic result 3
Not assigned
Input data
Input data
Input values
module 1
Input values
module 2
Input values
module 3
Input values
module 4
Input values
module 5
Input values
module 6
Input values
module 7
Input values
module 8
Input values
module 9
Input values
module 10
Input values
module 11
Input values
module 12
Output values
module 1
Output values
module 2
Output values
module 3
Output values
module 4
Output values
module 5
Output values
module 6
Output values
module 7
Output values
module 8
Output values
module 9
Output values
module 10
Output values
module 11
Output values
module 12
Gateway direct
output values 0
Gateway direct
output values 1
Gateway direct
output values 2
Gateway direct
output values 3
12 bytes
12 bytes
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not available
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
12 bytes
12 bytes
2 bytes
For detailed information about the content of the process image please see section 3.3
“Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)” on page 14.
For information on how to configure the process image, see chapter 7 “Layout and content
of the process image” on page 172 and the Flexi Soft Designer operating instructions
(SICK part no. 8012998).
92
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Data from the PLC to the FX3-CPUx
There are five (5) output data blocks, 10 bytes each.
The content of these data blocks can be used as input in the Flexi Soft logic editor or can
be routed via a second gateway into another network. In order to have the desired bits
available for routing or in the logic editor, tag names have to be defined for each bit that
shall be used. Bits without a tag name will not be available.
For detailed information how to define and customize the content and tag names of the
input and output data please see chapter 7 “Layout and content of the process image” on
page 172 and the operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK
part no. 8012998).
Settings within the PROFINET IO network configuration tool
Drag the data blocks from the SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager — HW Config hardware catalogue under >>PROFINET IO > Additional field devices > Gateway > SICK > Flexi
Soft... > data blocks into the slots of the FX0-GPNT shown in the SIEMENS SIMATIC
Manager — HW Config configuration table.
Fig. 46: Projecting the
FX0>GPNT
Notes
The I and Q addresses reflect where in memory the cyclic data will be available.
Each input data block can only be placed into the slot of the same number. Example:
Input data block 4 can only be mapped into slot 4.
Acyclic data and alarms
Record read
Flexi Soft system diagnostic data is available as data record to be read by the PLC. There
are three data sets, data set 2, 3 and 4, providing diagnostic information:
Data Set 2 contains the Flexi Soft checksums.
Data Set 3 contains the individual module status with four (4) bytes per module.
Data Set 4 is currently filled with reserved values.
The format of the data sets is as specified in the tables below.
To access the acyclic data sets, a record read must be performed on the appropriate
address as shown in the following table.
Tab. 68: Memory location for
data set 2, 3 and 4
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Data set 2
Data set 3
Data set 4
Location
1200-1231
1300-1359
1400-1459
Size in bytes
32 bytes
60 bytes
60 bytes
Data set 1 is mapped into the cyclic transferred PROFINET modules of the device. The
content may be defined by the user. Refer to chapter 7 “Layout and content of the process
image” on page 172 for details.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
93
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 69: Default content of
input data set 2-4 of the
FX0>GPNT.
For the interpretation of the
module status bit in data
set 3 please see section
3.3.6 “Error and status
information of the modules”
on page 19.
Data set 2
Data set 3
Total checksum
Module status module 0
Flexi Soft checksum
Module status module 1
Data set 4
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Module status module 2
Byte 10
Byte 11
Byte 12
Byte 13
Module status module 3
Byte 14
Byte 15
Byte 16
Byte 17
Module status module 4
Byte 18
Byte 19
Byte 20
CPU0 and CPU1: Reserved
CPU2 and CPU3:
ACR checksum
Byte 21
Reserved
Module status module 5
Byte 22
Byte 23
Byte 24
Byte 25
Module status module 6
Byte 26
Byte 27
Byte 28
Byte 29
Module status module 7
Byte 30
Byte 31
Byte …
…
Byte 49
…
Byte …
…
Byte 56
Module status module 14.
Module 13 and 14 are always
the gateways.
Byte 57
Byte 58
Byte 59
Length
94
32 bytes
60 bytes
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
60 bytes
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
I&M Information
The FX0-GPNT will support I&M information as required by the PROFINET specification. The
following I&M information will be able to be read from the device:
Tab. 70: I&M information of
the FX0-GPNT
I&M field
Size
Value
Manufacturer ID
2 bytes
257
Order ID
20 bytes
“1044078
”
(must be padded with
spaces)
Serial Number
16 bytes
Read from I2C
Hardware Revision
4 bytes
Read from I2C
Software Revision
4 bytes
Read from firmware
Revision Counter
2 bytes
0
Profile ID
2 bytes
Generic Device
Profile Specific Device
2 bytes
Generic Device
IM version
2 bytes
1.1
IM Supported
2 bytes
0
Alarms
Alarms can be read acyclically through the PROFINET IO alarms infrastructure. Once an
error occurs on any Flexi Soft module, the PROFINET IO gateway raises the appropriate
diagnostic alarm to the network. This will trigger the fault LED on the PLC, and make the
specifics (text and help) of the diagnostic alarm available through the SIMATIC PLC interface. The RALRM function block (SFB54) in OB82 (the diagnostic interrupt) allows the user
to retrieve specifics on the alarm raised within the PLC program itself.
Notes
All alarms are output to module 0.
The subslot number indicates the Flexi Soft module that has caused the alarm.
st
nd
st
Number 0 = CPU, 1 = 1 XT module, 2 = 2 XT module … 13 = 1 gateway,
nd
14 = 2 gateway.
The reason for the alarm is being identified by an error text message from the GSDML
file. Up to 32 different error messages per Flexi Soft module type are possible.
For the possible causes for an alarm please refer to Tab. 71.
The same diagnostic information is available through a record read to data set 3.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
95
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
The following table matches the PROFINET IO error type (as defined by the GSDML) to the
appropriate message.
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Tab. 71: PROFINET IO error
type definitions
Error type
Message
Error origin
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
CPU
0109
0200
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0208
0209
0210
0211
0212 … 0215
0216
0217
0218
0219
0220
0221
0222
0223
0224
0225
0226
0227
0228
0229
0230
0231
0300
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307 … 0331
96
XTIO/XTDI
PROFIBUS
gateway
Error definition
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0105 to 0107
Reserved
Configuration Flexi Soft system
Power supply
EFI1
EFI2
Flexi Link stations in the system
1 = All found
0 = One or more are missing
Flexi Link stations suspended
1 = None
0 = One or more
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0205 to 0207
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Output Fast-Shut-Off
Reserved
Input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation
Input 3-4 dual channel input evaluation
Input 5-6 dual channel input evaluation
Input 7-8 dual channel input evaluation
Reserved
External test signal Input 1
External test signal Input 2
External test signal Input 3
External test signal Input 4
External test signal Input 5
External test signal Input 6
External test signal Input 7
External test signal Input 8
Short-circuit monitoring output 1: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 1: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 2: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 2: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 3: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 3: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 4: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 4: short-circuit to low
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0305 to 0307 (external error)
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Error type
Message
Error origin
0400
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
0407 … 0431
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507 … 0531
0600
0601
0602
0603
0604
0605
0606
0607 … 0631
0700
0701
0702
0703
0704
0705
0706
0707 … 0731
0800
0801
0802
0803
0804
0805
0806
0805 … 0831
0C00
0C01
0C02
0C03
0C04
0C05
0C06
0C07 … 0C31
0F00
0F01
0F02
0F03
0F04
0F05
0F06
0F07 … 0F31
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Error definition
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0405 to 0407 (external error)
Reserved
CANopen
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0505 to 0507 (external error)
Reserved
DeviceNet
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0605 to 0607 (external error)
Reserved
Modbus gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0705 to 0707 (external error)
Reserved
EtherNet/IP
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0805 to 0807 (external error)
Reserved
PROFINET
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0C05 to 0C07 (external error)
Reserved
CC-Link gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 0F05 bis 0F07 (external error)
Reserved
Sercos III gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
97
Chapter 5
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Error type
Message
Error origin
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007 … 1031
1100 … 1F31
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008 … 2031
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108 … 2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116 … 2131
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212 … 2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224 … 2231
2300 … 3F31
12)
98
Error definition
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 1005 to 1007 (external error)
Reserved
EtherCAT gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Other gateways Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 2005 to 2007
Reserved
STIO
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Reserved
Output load (overcurrent) monitoring
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 2105 to 2107
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
MOCx
Reserved
Reserved
User-defined status bit 112)
User-defined status bit 212)
User-defined status bit 312)
User-defined status bit 412)
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 2205 to 2207
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Reserved
Output load (overcurrent) monitoring
Input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation
Input 3-4 dual channel input evaluation
Input 5-6 dual channel input evaluation
XTDS
Input 7-8 dual channel input evaluation
Reserved
External test signal Input 1
External test signal Input 2
External test signal Input 3
External test signal Input 4
External test signal Input 5
External test signal Input 6
External test signal Input 7
External test signal Input 8
Reserved
Other modules Reserved
The status of this bit can be defined to suit the specific application in the MOCx logic, e.g. to indicate
inadmissible movements of an axis that have been detected by an MOCx function block.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.4.5
TCP/IP configuration interface
See section 5.1.1 “TCP/IP configuration interface” on page 32.
5.4.6
Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface
See section 5.1.2 “Ethernet TCP/IP socket interface” on page 37.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
99
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.4.7
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
For information how to perform diagnostics on the Flexi Soft system please refer to the
operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK part no. 8012998).
Tab. 72: Troubleshooting for
the FX0-GPNT
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
The Flexi Soft Designer tool
does not connect to the Flexi
Soft gateway module.
FX0-GPNT has no power
supply.
FX0-GPNT is not in the same
physical network as the PC.
The PC is configured to
another subnet mask in the
TCP/IP settings.
FX0-GPNT has already been
configured once and has a
fixed set IP address or an IP
address assigned by a DHCP
server that is not recognised.
FX0-GPNT is configured for
data transfer to PLC, but
Ethernet communication is not
yet established or faulty.
Duplicate IP address detected.
Another device on the network
has the same IP address.
Improperly formatted
PROFINET device name.
Establish the power supply.
Check the Ethernet wiring and network
settings on the PC and correct if necessary.
Set the subnet mask on the PC to
255.255.0.0 (factory setting of the
FX0RGPNT).
Check the communication settings in the Flexi
Soft Designer.
FX0-GPNT does not supply
any data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS
Red/green13)
FX0-GPNT does not supply
any data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GPNT does not supply
any data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS
Green (1 Hz)
FX0-GPNT does not supply
any data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS
Green (2 Hz)
FX0-GPNT functioned correctly after configuration, but suddenly no longer supplies data.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS
Red/green13)
Configuration required.
Configuration download is not
completed.
No data set is activated.
Flexi Soft system is in Idle
mode.
Activate at least one data set.
Start CPU (change into Run state).
PROFINET master requested
LED flashing for physical
device identification.
Stop flashing with Simatic Manager or power
cycle Flexi Soft system to clear.
FX0-GPNT is operated in slave
mode, the IP address is assigned from a DHCP server. After
the FX0-GPNT or the DHCP
server has been restarted, a
different IP address that is
unknown to the PLC has been
assigned to the FX0-GPNT.
FX0-GPNT/Flexi Soft system is FX0-GPNT is not plugged
properly into the other Flexi
in Critical fault mode.
Soft module.
PWR Green
LINK/ACT
Green
Module connecting plug is
STATUS Red
soiled or damaged.
Other Flexi Soft module has
internal critical error.
FX0-GPNT internal device error
FX0-GPNT is in Critical fault
mode.
CPU firmware version does not
PWR Green
support Flexi Soft gateways.
LINK/ACT /
Green
STATUS
Red (2 Hz)
13)
100
Minimum one Ethernet connection needs to
be established. Set up Ethernet connection on
PLC side, check Ethernet cabling, check
Ethernet connection settings on PLC and in
the Flexi Soft Designer. If no Ethernet communication is required, disable the Ethernet
connections/PLC interfaces on the FX0-GPNT.
Adjust IP address and power cycle device.
Adjust device name between PROFINET
Master and FX0-GPNT.
Configure the FX0-GPNT and download the
configuration to the device.
Wait until the configuration download has
been completed.
Either assign a fixed IP address to the
FX0RGPNT, or reserve a fixed IP address for
the FX0RGPNT in the DHCP server (manual
assignment by means of the MAC address of
the FX0-GPNT).
Plug the FX0-GPNT in correctly
Clean the connecting socket/plug.
Repower the system.
Check the other Flexi Soft modules.
Switch off the power supply of the Flexi Soft
system and switch it on again.
Check the diagnostics messages with Flexi
Soft Designer.
Use a FX3-CPUx with the required firmware
version (see section 2.2 “Correct use” on
page 10).
If the error remains, replace the gateway.
With firmware O V2.00.0 the red/green flashing of the STATUS LED can be disabled in the Flexi Soft Designer.
In this case, the STATUS LED is Green permanently, if the configuration is valid.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.5
EtherCAT gateway
®
“EtherCAT is registered trademark and
patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff
Automation GmbH, Germany.”
The following Flexi Soft gateway can be used for EtherCAT: FX0-GETC.
You will find the ESI file and the device icon for PLC interfacing with EtherCAT support …
in the Internet on the FX0-GETC product page on www.sick.com.
in the Flexi Soft Designer program folder on your hard disk (default installation folder is
“C:\programs\SICK\FlexiSoft\DeviceDescriptions\...”).
The FX0-GETC is an EtherCAT slave device. It supports and requires the following services
for complete function:
Configuration and diagnostics of the
Flexi Soft station via TCP/IP, tunneled in
EtherCAT using the EoE (Ethernet over
EtherCAT) protocol
5.5.1
CoE (CAN application layer over
EtherCAT)
Station diagnostics via CoE object
10F3h
Interfaces and operation
Controls and status indicators
Fig. 47: Controls and status
indicators FX0-GETC
RJ-45 EtherCAT input port
Module Status LED (green)
LED network activity (Link/Act)
for each EtherCAT port (green)
EtherCAT Error LED (red)
EtherCAT Run LED (green)
RJ-45 EtherCAT output port
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
101
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 73: Meaning of the
status LEDs of the FX0-GETC
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
LED
Meaning
MS
Power-up
Green
Flexi Soft system is in the Run state.
Green (1 Hz)
Flexi Soft system is in the Stop state.
Red (1 Hz)
Invalid configuration
Red (2 Hz)
Critical error on the gateway
Red
Red/green
ERR
Critical fault on another module
Recoverable external error
No error
Red (2.5 Hz)
Invalid configuration
Red (single flash)
Pre-operational caused by system behaviour
(e.g. configuration in progress or required)
Red (double flash)
Timeout (connection lost)
Red
RUN
System error
Init
Green (2.5 Hz)
Pre-operational
Green (single flash) Safe-operational
Green
Link/
Act
No EtherCAT connection
Green
Green
Note
Operational
EtherCAT connection active, no data transmission
EtherCAT connection active, data transmission
For error diagnostics and troubleshooting see section 5.5.10 “Diagnostics and
troubleshooting” on page 114.
Power-up sequence
On power-up, the following LED test sequence is performed:
All LEDs
Off for 6 s
MS LED
Red for 0.25 s
MS LED
Green for 0.25 s
MS LED
Off
ERR LED
Red for 0.25 s
ERR LED
Off
RUN LED
Green for 0.25 s
RUN LED
Off
Cabling requirements
EtherCAT is based on a Fast Ethernet cabling infrastructure that is characterized as
follows:
type 100 Base-TX
RJ-45 connectors
twisted pair Ethernet cable, max. length 100 m according to DIN EN 50 173
use of core pairs 1/2 and 3/6
screened cables are recommended
102
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.5.2
Installation of the gateway in the Flexi Soft system
This section outlines the basic steps to install the gateway in the Flexi Soft system. More
detailed information will be given in the following sections.
Add the gateway to a Flexi Soft system
Mount the gateway as described in section 4.1.1 “Steps for mounting the modules” on
page 24.
Connect the FX0-GETC to your EtherCAT network using Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors. The upper connector on the gateway is the input port (ECAT IN) and is connected to the PLC side of the network. The lower connector is the output port (ECAT OUT)
where further EtherCAT devices can be connected. If the output port is not used it can
remain unconnected.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the gateway
or create a new Flexi Soft system with an FX0-GETC in the Flexi Soft Designer.
Configure the gateway in the Flexi Soft system
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GETC or
double click the FX0-GETC in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway configuration dialog. The configuration dialog is divided into three areas: CPU to EtherCAT,
EtherCAT to CPU and Gateway configuration that can be accessed through the icons
on the left.
In the CPU to EtherCAT area, select the data that shall be transferred from the Flexi
Soft system to the EtherCAT network. Up to 50 bytes can be used which are divided in
five input data sets with 10 bytes each.
In the EtherCAT to CPU area, select the data that shall be transferred from the
EtherCAT network to the Flexi Soft system. Up to 50 bytes can be used which are
divided in five output data sets with 10 bytes each.
In the Gateway configuration area, you can change the device name of the gateway in
the Flexi Soft system. The default name of the gateway is “GETC”.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
103
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 48: Gateway configuration dialog for the FX0-GETC
Note
In the middle of the screen, the station alias (second station address) of the gateway and
the EoE parameters are displayed. This data is only informative; it is set in the EtherCAT
network configuration tool (e.g. TwinCAT).
5.5.3
Note
EtherCAT configuration of the gateway
This document does not cover the creation of the EtherCAT network or the rest of the automation system project in the network configuration tool. It is assumed the EtherCAT project
has already been set up in the configuration program, e.g. TwinCAT. Examples refer to
configurations performed with TwinCAT V2.11.0.
The following steps need to be taken in order to configure the communication between
PLC and gateway.
Step 1: Install the EtherCAT Slave Information (ESI) file
The ESI file FX0-GETC.xml contains the information that is needed for the integration of the
FX0-GETC in the EtherCAT network. Before the FX0-GETC can be used as device in the
EtherCAT network configuration tool (e.g. TwinCAT) for the first time, the ESI file of the
gateway must be installed into the hardware catalogue of the tool.
You will find the ESI file in the Flexi Soft Designer program folder (default folder is
“C:\programs\SICK\FlexiSoft\DeviceDescriptions\FX0-GETC_ESI”).
You can also download the ESI file from www.sick.com, on the FX0-GETC product page.
Follow the instructions in the online help or in the user manual of the EtherCAT network
configuration tool for installing ESI files.
Example — How to install the ESI file using TwinCAT:
Copy the ESI file FX0-GETC.xml in the TwinCAT folder under “TwinCAT\Io\EtherCAT\”.
Restart TwinCAT in order to rebuild its ESI cache.
104
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Step 2: Insert the gateway into the EtherCAT network
In order to have the Flexi Soft system data available in the PLC process image, the gateway must be added to the hardware configuration first. The procedure associated with this
depends on the hardware configuration program of the PLC being used. On this topic,
please also read the documentation for the corresponding program.
Example — How to insert the FX0-GETC using TwinCAT:
In order to integrate the gateway manually into the EtherCAT network, use the Append
box command and select the Flexi Soft EtherCAT gateway.
Fig. 49: Example for inserting
the FX0-GETC into an
EtherCAT network
Alternatively you can perform a network scan using the Scan boxes command.
Step 3: Select and configure the process data objects (PDOs)
After adding the device to the automation network you must configure which of the process data objects (PDOs) you want to use.
The FX0-GETC provides five input PDOs for the transfer of input data to a connected PLC
that can be used alternatively. I.e. only one of these five input PDOs can be active at any
time. There is one input PDO for 10 byte input data (1 data set used in the Flexi Soft
Designer), one for 20 byte data (2 data sets used) etc. up to the maximum of 50 byte.
Similarly you must select one out of five different available output PDOs from 10 to 50
bytes into which the PLC output data can be written.
Notes
The structure of the PDOs is predefined and can not be edited.
The input data PDOs contain an additional first byte for the diagnostics flag (Diag). This
byte is set to True (“1”) if a new diagnosis message (CoE object 10F3h) is available and
to False (“0”) if all diagnosis messages are acknowledged.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
105
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 74: Process data
objects of the FX0-GETC
Input PDOs
Index
Size
Content
1A00h
11 bytes
Diag byte + input data set 1
1A01h
21 bytes
Diag byte + input data sets 1-2
1A02h
31 bytes
Diag byte + input data sets 1-3
1A03h
41 bytes
Diag byte + input data sets 1-4
1A04h
51 bytes
Diag byte + input data sets 1-5
Index
Size
Content
1600h
10 bytes
Output data set 1
1601h
20 bytes
Output data sets 1-2
1602h
30 bytes
Output data sets 1-3
1603h
40 bytes
Output data sets 1-4
1604h
50 bytes
Output data sets 1-5
Output PDOs
Select one of the five available PDOs for each data transfer direction (input and output)
with the appropriate size for the used process data in the EtherCAT network configuration tool.
Notes
Only one input PDO and one output PDO can be active at any time.
If the selected PDO is greater than the process data configured, unused data will be
filled with zeroes.
If the selected PDO is smaller than the process data configured, excess data will be
truncated.
Example — How to select the PDOs using TwinCAT:
Under the Process Data file card, select the desired PDO type (Inputs or Outputs) in the
Sync Manager selection list.
Then select the desired PDO in the PDO Assignment selection list. In order to change
the PDO you need to deselect the active one first.
In the Download area, select PDO Assignment but leave PDO Configuration unchecked
since the PDO configuration is predefined and can not be changed.
Fig. 50: PDO configuration in
the EtherCAT network configuration tool
106
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.5.4
Input data — Flexi Soft to EtherCAT
The FX0-GETC can transfer up to 50 bytes input data to a connected PLC over EtherCAT.
The input data are divided into five data sets.
Notes
Each input data set contains 10 bytes.
The contents of the data sets are freely selectable, but are preconfigured in the Flexi
Soft Designer configuration software (see Tab. 75).
If an input data set contains any data, the complete 10 byte set is sent over EtherCAT.
Tab. 75: Default content of
input data set 1-5 of the
FX0>GETC
Data set 1
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Length
Data set 2
Data set 3
Data set 4
Data set 5
Input data
Input data
Input data
Input data
Input data
Input values
module 1
Input values
module 2
Input values
module 3
Input values
module 4
Input values
module 5
Input values
module 6
Input values
module 7
Input values
module 8
Input values
module 9
Input values
module 10
Input values
module 11
Input values
module 12
Output values
module 1
Output values
module 2
Output values
module 3
Output values
module 4
Output values
module 5
Output values
module 6
Output values
module 7
Output values
module 8
Output values
module 9
Output values
module 10
Output values
module 11
Output values
module 12
Gateway direct
output values 2
Gateway direct
output values 3
Gateway direct
output values 0
Gateway direct
output values 1
10 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 0
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 1
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 2
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 3
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
10 bytes
10 bytes
For detailed information about the content of the process image please see section 3.3
“Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)” on page 14.
For further information on how to configure the process image, see chapter 7 “Layout and
content of the process image” on page 172 and the Flexi Soft Designer operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012998).
Note
The process data can also be read using the CoE objects 2000h and 2001h (see section
5.5.9 “CoE (CAN application layer over EtherCAT)” on page 111). The simple SDO access is
recommended for diagnostic purposes. In normal operation the faster PDO communication
should be used.
5.5.5
Output data — EtherCAT to Flexi Soft
The FX0-GETC can receive up to 50 bytes input data from a connected PLC over EtherCAT.
Similar to the input data, the output data are divided into five data sets.
Notes
Each output data set contains 10 bytes.
The contents of the output data sets can be configured in the Flexi Soft Designer configuration software. See section 7.3.6 “Output data configuration (Network to Flexi Soft)”
on page 179.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
107
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.5.6
Tag name export
The Flexi Soft Designer allows you to export the names of the bits used in the input and
output data sets. Before exporting you can also edit the start addresses for the used data
sets in the PLC. The exported tag names and start addresses can then be imported as
variables to the application program in the EtherCAT network configuration tool (e.g.
TwinCAT PLC). This speeds up the generation of the PLC program and makes it easier to
identify each bit in the EtherCAT PDOs.
How to export the tag names:
The input and output data sets must be exported separately. Depending on whether you
want to export the tag names of the input or output data sets, open the CPU to
EtherCAT or the EtherCAT to CPU configuration page.
Click on the Export button in the toolbar. A dialog window opens.
Select the destination folder, enter a name for the export file, select the required file
type (e.g. *.csv or *.exp for TwinCAT) from the selection list at the bottom of the dialog
window and click on Save to export the file.
Notes
For each used data set the export creates a 10 byte structure with the byte or module
names and a bit variable for each used bit.
The name of the bit variable consists of the application name, the name of the byte and
the name of the bit.
It is recommended to assign a tag name to each module in the Flexi Soft configuration
and to use unique tag names for all modules, bytes and bits. Special characters in the
names are deleted and spaces are replaced with the character “_”.
The start address for each data set in the TwinCAT PLC process image can be changed
in the gateway configuration menu (see below).
108
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
How to change the start address for the data sets:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
EtherCAT gateway. Ensure your project is offline.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GETC or
double click the FX0-GETC in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 51: EtherCAT gateway
configuration dialog
Click on the button to the right of the data set for which you want to change the start
address. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 52: Edit the data block
start address
Type in the desired new start address or use the arrows to change the address. The
address will be checked automatically for plausibility, i.e. it is not possible to configure
data sets with overlapping address ranges.
Click OK to accept the new start address.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
109
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.5.7
Ethernet over EtherCAT (EoE)
The EoE functionality of the gateway needs to be activated via the EtherCAT network
configuration tool (e.g. TwinCAT) before it can be used. The gateway itself has no real MAC
address. Therefore it is necessary to assign a virtual MAC address and the IP settings to
the device.
Follow the instructions in the online help or in the user manual of your EtherCAT
network configuration tool for activating EoE.
Fig. 53: EoE activation for the
FX0-GETC in TwinCAT
If the EoE configuration is loaded to the gateway it can be accessed over Ethernet by the
Flexi Soft Designer.
Note
The EoE protocol only works if the gateway is in the Pre-Operational state or higher,
because it relies on the EtherCAT mailboxes of the Gateway, which are not available in the
Init state.
5.5.8
TCP/IP configuration interface
In order to use the TCP/IP communication interface, the FX0-GETC must be part of a
working EtherCAT network. EoE functionality must be enabled for the Flexi Soft system and
an IP address and a subnet mask must be assigned to it in the EtherCAT configuration
tool.
Follow the instructions in the online help or in the user manual of your EtherCAT
network configuration tool for assigning an IP address and a subnet mask.
If the EtherCAT master and the Flexi Soft Designer are running on different PCs, then
TCP/IP routing must be enabled in the Flexi Soft Designer.
In the Com settings window, create a new TCP/IP profile or modify an existing TCP/IP
profile for the FX0-GETC, activate the checkbox for Enable TCP/IP routing and enter a
suitable Subnet address and Gateway address.
110
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ethernet gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 54: Enabling TCP/IP
routing for the FX0-GETC in
the Flexi Soft Designer
Note
The Default Gateway in the EoE settings of the EtherCAT gateway in your EtherCAT
network configuration tool must be set correctly in order to establish a communication.
5.5.9
CoE (CAN application layer over EtherCAT)
The FX0-GETC supports various CoE objects. They can be viewed in the EtherCAT network
configuration tool or used in an application through SDO read commands.
In addition to the standard EtherCAT objects the FX0-GETC has a number of vendor
specific objects.
Fig. 55: CoE object catalogue
of the FX0-GETC in TwinCAT
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
The CoE objects can only be read, i.e. it is not possible to change the input or output
process data or other CoE objects via SDO commands.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
111
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Input process data (2000h)
This object contains the input process data from the Flexi Soft system to an EtherCAT PLC
and makes them available for acyclic usage. It corresponds to the EtherCAT input PDO
data of the FX0-GETC.
Tab. 76: FX0-GETC Input
Process Data CoE object
2000h
Index
Subindex
Name
Size
01
Dataset1
10 bytes
02
Dataset2
10 bytes
03
Dataset3
10 bytes
04
Dataset4
10 bytes
05
Dataset5
10 bytes
2000h
Output process data (2001h)
This object contains the output process data from an EtherCAT PLC to the Flexi Soft system and makes them available for acyclic usage. It corresponds to the EtherCAT output
PDO data of the FX0-GETC.
Tab. 77: FX0-GETC Output
Process Data CoE object
2001h
Index
Subindex
Name
Size
01
Dataset1
10 bytes
02
Dataset2
10 bytes
03
Dataset3
10 bytes
04
Dataset4
10 bytes
05
Dataset5
10 bytes
2001h
Checksums (2002h)
This object contains the checksums described in section 3.3.5 “Configuration checksums”
on page 19.
Tab. 78: FX0-GETC
checksums in CoE object
2002h
Index
Subindex
Name
Size
01
Total checksum
4 bytes
02
Flexi Soft checksum
CPU0 and CPU1:
Reserved
CPU2 and CPU3:
ACR checksum
4 bytes
2002h
03
4 bytes
Status and diagnosis (2003h)
This object contains the module status bits of the Flexi Soft system. Each Flexi Soft module
has 32 status bits, each representing a possible error message of the module. The meaning of each bit depends on the type of module. For details see section 3.3.6 “Error and
status information of the modules” on page 19.
The gateway uses these module status bits internally in order to generate the error
messages displayed in object 10F3h.
Tab. 79: FX0-GETC Status
and Diagnosis CoE object
2003h
Index
2003h
Subindex
Name
Size
01
FX3-CPUx
4 bytes
02
Module 1
4 bytes
03 … 0D
Module 2 … Module 12
4 bytes
0E
Gateway 1
4 bytes
0F
Gateway 2
4 bytes
Reserved (2004h)
This object is reserved for future use.
112
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
Diagnosis history (10F3h)
The Diagnosis history lists the entries in object 2003h chronologically. If the Diagnosis
history contains new entries that have not yet been confirmed, the Diag byte in the input
process image (i.e. the first byte of the EtherCAT input PDO and of the CoE object 2000h)
is set to True.
Subindex 1 of the Diagnosis history contains the maximum number of possible diagnosis
history entries. Subindex 2 (Newest) refers to the newest diagnosis message. Subindex 3
(Acknowledged) refers to the last message that has been confirmed or — if no messages
have been confirmed so far — to the last entry. Subindex 4 is True if Reading is required
(i.e. if Newest and Acknowledged are different).
Tab. 80: Structure of the
Diagnosis history object
Subindex [hex]
Content
Format
Comments
01h
Max. entry number
UNSIGNED8
02h
Newest
UNSIGNED8
= Subindex of the newest
history entry (e.g. 2Ah)
03h
Acknowledged
UNSIGNED8
= Subindex of the last
acknowledged history entry
04h
Reading required
BOOLEAN
= True, if Newest is not the
same as Acknowledged
05h
Flags
UNSIGNED16
Flags to control the sending
and storing of diagnosis
messages — the Flexi Soft
EtherCAT gateway does not
support any of the optional
options.
06h-69h
Diagnosis history entries
OCTET STRING See below.
The Diagnosis history object is structured as a ring buffer. If subindex 69h has been
written, the next entry will start over with subindex 06h.
If the number of unconfirmed diagnosis messages reaches 100, older messages will not
be overwritten. Instead the newest diagnosis message is replaced by a buffer overflow
error message (FFFFh).
Detailed information about the structure and usage of this object can be found in the
“EtherCAT Protocol Enhancements” document by the EtherCAT Technology Group
(ETG.1020) which can be obtained via the internet on www.ethercat.org.
Each diagnosis message consists of a diagnosis code and an ASCII string containing the
message parameter set.
The diagnosis code consists of the module number and the diagnosis bit of the respective
module.
The ASCII string is “module xx +” or “module xx -”, where xx stands for the position in the
Flexi Soft system of the module that has generated the diagnosis message. Coming diagnosis messages are marked with a “+”, going diagnosis messages are marked with a “-”.
If a problem has been diagnosed and resolved subsequently, the object 10F3h will contain
two diagnosis messages that differ only by the trailing “+” or “-”.
The FX0-GETC does not support a time stamp for the Diagnosis history object. If a time
stamp is required, the reading device (e.g. the PLC) can be programmed to add the time
stamp when a diagnosis message is read.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
113
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
5.5.10
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
The FX0-GETC provides the following module status bits in the Flexi Soft system for diagnostic purposes. The module number of the FX0-GETC is 16.
Tab. 81: Module status bits
of the FX0-GETC
Bit
Error message
Possible causes
0
Module not in operation
No process data connection with the PLC
1
Module has internal error
Hardware error. Replace module
2
Module has external error
No process data connection with the PLC
3
Reserved
n/a
Configuration invalid or
incompatible
The configuration of the Flexi Soft system is
invalid, e.g. a hardware component has
been added or removed or has been
replaced by an incompatible device
Module input status invalid
No process data connection with the PLC
4
Configuration required or in progress
5
EtherCAT status is Pre-operational or less
6
7 … 31
114
Module output status invalid
No process data connection with the PLC
EtherCAT status is Safe-operational or less
Reserved
n/a
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Ethernet gateways
Chapter 5
Flexi Soft Gateways
For information how to perform diagnostics on the Flexi Soft system please refer to the
operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK part no. 8012998).
Tab. 82: Troubleshooting for
the FX0-GETC
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
The Flexi Soft Designer tool
does not connect to the Flexi
Soft gateway module
FX0-GETC has no power supply.
FX0-GETC does not supply any
data.
MS
Red (1 Hz)
ERR
Red (2.5 Hz)
RUN Off
FX0-GETC does not supply any
data.
MS Red/green
ERR Off
RUN Green (2.5 Hz)
FX0-GETC does not supply any
data.
MS
Green (1 Hz)
ERR Off
RUN Green
FX0-GETC does not supply any
data.
MS Green
ERR Off
RUN Green
FX0-GETC is in Critical fault
mode.
MS
Red (2 Hz)
ERR Red
RUN Off
Configuration required.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Establish the power supply.
Check the communication settings in
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Configure the FX0-GETC and download
the configuration to the device.
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
FX0-GETC/Flexi Soft System is
in Critical fault mode
MS Red
ERR Red
RUN Off
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
No input PDO is activated.
Activate an input PDO.
Flexi Soft system is in the Stop
state.
CPU/application is stopped. Start CPU
(change into Run state).
EtherCAT PLC is in Stop state.
Set EtherCAT PLC into Run state.
FX0-GETC internal device error.
CPU firmware version does not
support Flexi Soft gateways.
Switch off the power supply of the Flexi
Soft system and switch it on again.
Check the diagnostics messages with
Flexi Soft Designer.
Use a FX3-CPUx with the required
firmware version (see section 2.2
“Correct use” on page 10).
If the error remains, replace the
gateway.
Plug the FX0-GETC in correctly.
Clean the connecting socket/plug.
Repower the system.
Check the other Flexi Soft modules.
Check the diagnostics messages with
Flexi Soft Designer.
FX0-GETC is not plugged properly
into the other Flexi Soft module.
Module connecting plug is soiled or
damaged.
Other Flexi Soft module has
internal critical error.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
115
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
6
Fieldbus gateways
6.1
PROFIBUS DP gateway
The following Flexi Soft gateway can be used for PROFIBUS DP: FX0-GPRO.
6.1.1
Interfaces and operation
Controls and status indicators
Fig. 56: Controls and status
indicators FX0-GPRO
BF LED (red)
Address switch 1
MS LED (red/green)
PROFIBUS connection
PWR LED (red/green)
Tab. 83: Meaning of the
status LEDs of the FX0-GPRO
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
Address switch 2
LED
Meaning
BF
Connection to DP master established
Red
MS
No bus connection: Fieldbus cable break, address fault
or master is not (or no longer) writing to the bus
Power-up, waiting for bus off
Green
Executing
Green
Idle
Red/green
Executing, but there is an error at the gateway
Red
1 Hz: Configuration required or in progress
2 Hz: Critical fault on gateway
Red
PWR
116
Critical fault on another module
No power supply
Green
Power supply switched on, no error
Red
Critical fault
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 84: Address switch
FX0>GPRO
Switch
× 10
×1
Function
Address switch 1
10 position rotary switch for setting the module address (tens)
Address switch 2
10 position rotary switch for setting the module address (ones)
How to set the PROFIBUS DP address via hardware address switches:
Set the PROFIBUS DP address using the hardware address switches on the device front.
Then switch the Flexi Soft system off and back on again.
How to set the PROFIBUS DP address via software using the Flexi Soft Designer:
Set the two hardware address switches on the device front to “00”.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
PROFIBUS DP gateway. Ensure your project is offline.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GPRO or
double click the FX0-GPRO in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 57: Setting the
PROFIBUS address for the
FX0>GPRO
Select the PROFIBUS address in the PROFIBUS address field.
Click Connect to go online and transfer the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Notes
The address that can be set via the hardware address switch ranges from 1 … 99.
The address that can be set via the Flexi Soft Designer software ranges from 3 … 125.
The PROFIBUS master cannot overwrite the address.
A modified address setting only becomes effective after switching off and switching on
the Flexi Soft system.
In online mode, you can read the address set on the PROFIBUS DP gateway by clicking
on the Read button above the PROFIBUS address field.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
117
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Plug assignment
The connection to the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus is made using a 9 pin DRSub socket.
Fig. 58: D-Sub socket and
plug pin assignments
FX0>GPRO
Pin
Pin 1
Pin 9
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
NC
2
NC
3
RxD/TxD-P
Pin 8
4
CNTR-P
Pin 7
5
GND-EXT
6
+5V-EXT
7
NC
8
RxD/TxD-N
9
CNTR-N (GND-EXT)
Pin 6
Pin 5
Description
1
SHLD
SHLD Shield
Bus cable
The bus topology for PROFIBUS DP is a linear structure comprising a screened, twisted
2 core cable with active bus termination at both ends. The possible bus lengths are 100 m
at 12 Mbit/s up to 1,200 m at 94 kbit/s.
Fig. 59: Bus cable FX0-GPRO
Tab. 85: Explanation bus
cable FX0-GPRO
Position
Description
1
PROFIBUS user grey
2
Shielded bus cable
3
PROFIBUS termination yellow (with integrated terminating resistors)
Cable parameters
The properties of the bus cable are specified in EN 50 170 as cable type A.
Tab. 86: Cable parameters
FX0>GPRO
118
Property
Value
Characteristic impedance
135-165 a (at a frequency of 3-20 MHz)
Capacitance per unit length
< 30 pF/m
Loop resistance
b 110 a/km
Core diameter
> 0.64 mm
Core cross-section
> 0.34 mm
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
2
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
With these cable parameters, the following maximum physical sizes are possible for a bus
segment:
Tab. 87: Maximum cable
lengths FX0-GPRO
Baud rate [kbit/s]
Max. cable length [m]
9.6
1200
19.2
1200
93.75
1200
187.5
1000
500
400
1500
200
12000
100
Data transmission rate
The data transmission rate is set automatically.
The maximum baud rate is 12 Mbit/s.
Configuration comparison of the Alarm bitmask
This check box in the dialog box for the gateway configuration is provided for compatibility reasons and, as a rule, should not be changed. On loading configurations that have
been prepared using a version of Flexi Soft Designer < 1.3.1 the check box is cleared. In
the case of configurations that have been prepared using Flexi Soft Designer 1.3.1 or
higher, the check box is selected.
With the check box selected the Alarm bitmasks in the device are updated by Flexi Soft
Designer. This function is available for FX0-GPRO with firmware versions from V1.30.0. In
this way it is possible to modify the scope of the alarms generated on the fieldbus side to
new software versions on other modules.
If you change the status of this check box for a configuration already verified, then you
must verify this configuration again.
6.1.2
Planning
GSD file
Normally the FX0-GPRO is used on a DP master that looks up the device characteristics in
the GSD file.
You will find the GSD file and device icon for PLC interfacing with PROFIBUS support …
on the FX0-GPRO product page on the Internet at www.sick.com.
in the Flexi Soft Designer program folder on your hard disk (default installation folder is
“C:\programs\SICK\FlexiSoft\DeviceDescriptions\...”).
Note
Tab. 88: GSD file versions for
the FX0-GPRO
There are two different GSD files available which should be used depending on the
FX0RGPRO gateway’s firmware version:
FX0-GPRO firmware version
GSD file
Functionality
V1.00-V1.29
SICK0C18.gsd
DP-V0 Slave
O V1.30
SIC_0C18.gsd
DP-V1 Slave
FX0-GPRO gateways with firmware version O V1.30 will work with the GSD file
SICK0C18.gsd as well, but will only support DP-V0 slave functionality.
FX0-GPRO gateways with firmware versions V1.00 to V1.29 will not work with the GSD file
SIC_0C18.gsd.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
119
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Note
In DP-V1 slave mode only reading of I&M0 data is supported. This can be triggered by a
Class 1 or Class 2 master.
Operational data transmitted by the FX0-GPRO PROFIBUS DP
The FX0-GPRO GSD file provides input/output data blocks (virtual I/O device modules)
containing the operational data. These 5 blocks must be projected in a DP configurator in
natural order (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). No other sequence is possible.
Fig. 60: PROFIBUS DP
configuration example in
Siemens SIMATIC Manager
Notes
Depending on the type of PLC used, further modules may be displayed (e.g.“universal
module”). These modules are not needed and should be ignored.
The data blocks 1-4 contain 12 bytes each, data block 5 contains 2 bytes.
The contents of the data blocks are freely selectable, but are preconfigured in the Flexi
Soft Designer configuration software:
120
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 89: Default content of
input data block 1-5 of the
FX0>GPRO
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Byte 10
Byte 11
Length
Data block 1
Data block 2
Data block 3
Data block 4
Data block 5
Input data
Input data
Input data
Input data
Input data
Input values
module 1
Input values
module 2
Input values
module 3
Input values
module 4
Input values
module 5
Input values
module 6
Input values
module 7
Input values
module 8
Input values
module 9
Input values
module 10
Input values
module 11
Input values
module 12
Output values
module 1
Output values
module 2
Output values
module 3
Output values
module 4
Output values
module 5
Output values
module 6
Output values
module 7
Output values
module 8
Output values
module 9
Output values
module 10
Output values
module 11
Output values
module 12
Logic result 0
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 1
Not assigned
Not assigned
Logic result 2
Not assigned
Logic result 3
Not assigned
Gateway direct
output values 0
Gateway direct
output values 1
Gateway direct
output values 2
Gateway direct
output values 3
12 bytes
12 bytes
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not available
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
12 bytes
12 bytes
2 bytes
For detailed information about the content of the process image please see section 3.3
“Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)” on page 14.
How to set the start address for the data blocks:
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
PROFIBUS DP gateway. Ensure your project is offline.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GPRO or
double click the FX0-GPRO in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
121
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 61: PROFIBUS DP gateway configuration dialog
Click on the button to the right of the data block for which you want to change the start
address. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 62: Edit the data block
start address
Type in the desired new start address or use the arrows to change the address. The address set will be checked automatically for plausibility, i.e. it is not possible to configure
data blocks with overlapping address ranges.
Click OK to accept the new start address.
For further information on how to configure the process image, see chapter 7 “Layout and
content of the process image” on page 172 and the Flexi Soft Designer operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012998).
6.1.3
PROFIBUS configuration of the gateway — How the data are transferred
The following steps need to be taken in order to configure the communication between
PLC and gateway.
Note
122
This document does not cover the creation of the PROFIBUS DP network or the rest of the
automation system project in the network configuration tool. It is assumed the PROFIBUS
project has already been set up in the configuration program, e.g. SIEMENS SIMATIC
Manager. Examples refer to configurations performed with SIEMENS SIMATIC manager.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Step 1: Install the generic station description file (GSD file)
Before the FX0-GPRO can be used as device in the network configuration tool, e.g.
SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager, for the first time, the generic station description (GSD) of the
gateway must be installed into the hardware catalogue of the tool.
Download the GSD file and device icon from www.sick.com, on the FX0-GPRO product
page.
Follow the instructions in the online help or in the user manual of the PROFINET network
configuration tool for installing generic station description files.
Using the SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager — HW Config, the gateway then appears in the hardware catalogue under >>PROFIBUS DP > Additional Field Devices > Gateway > SICK >
Flexi Soft.
Step 2: Add the gateway to the project
In order to have the Flexi Soft system data available in the PLC process image, the gateway must be added to the hardware configuration first. The procedure associated with this
depends on the hardware configuration program of the PLC being used. On this topic,
please also read the documentation for the corresponding program.
The example below shows how to add the gateway to a SIEMENS SIMATIC Manager
project.
In the SIEMENS SIMATIC Hardware Manager, the gateway can be found in the hardware
catalogue under >>PROFIBUS DP > Additional Field Devices > Gateway > SICK >
Flexi Soft.
Drag & drop the device into the PROFIBUS network. Example:
Fig. 63: PROFIBUS DP gateway in the PROFIBUS HW
Config
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
The universal module does not support any data exchange. Please select only Input/
Output Data Block 1-5.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
123
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Diagnostics data FX0-GPRO PROFIBUS DP
With the FX0-GPRO, diagnostics data are available via PROFIBUS standard DP-V0
diagnostics:
standard diagnostics (6 bytes)
device related diagnostics: status messages or manufacturer specific messages
Each Flexi Soft module supports a unique module ID. Based on this ID the gateway determines the manufacturer specific diagnostics number. This way it is possible to retrieve
module specific diagnostics texts from the GSD file. The content of the diagnostics message is shown in Tab. 90.
Tab. 90: Content of the
PROFIBUS diagnostics
messages
Octet
Content
Comment
7
8
9
09h
See Tab. 91
0
10
(Bit 0 … 2)
10
(Bit 3 … 7)
000, 001 or
010
00000…11111
Header
Module number
PROFIBUS module slot number. The PROFIBUS gateway supports five slots,
which do not represent the physical slots, thus all messages shall be tied to
slot 0 (gateway itself).
000 = All errors going, 001 = Error coming, 010 = Error going
11
0 … 14
12 … 15
Variable
Alarm sequence number, will be incremented for each state change of
octet 10 Bit 0 … 2 (error coming/going)
In the case of modules with firmware V1.30 and later the alarm sequence
number is not used for reasons of conformity with the PROFIBUS DP specification. These bits are therefore always 0 for these modules.
Position of the Flexi Soft module raising the diagnostic information.
0 = FX3-CPUx
1 = 1st extension module
…
13 = 1st gateway
14 = 2nd gateway
(relay modules are not counted)
4 bytes module specific diagnostics data. See Tab. 92.
The following table lists the module numbers for the Flexi Soft system.
Tab. 91: Flexi Soft module
numbers
124
Module number [dec]
Module number [hex]
Module
161
A1
Flexi Soft main module (FX3-CPUx)
162
A2
FX3-XT module (FX3-XTDI, FX3-XTIO)
163
A3
PROFIBUS gateway (FX0-GPRO)
164
A4
CANopen gateway (FX0-GCAN)
165
A5
DeviceNet gateway (FX0-GDEV)
166
A6
Modbus gateway (FX0-GMOD)
167
A7
EtherNet/IP gateway (FX0-GENT)
168
A8
PROFINET IO gateway (FX0-GPNT)
172
AC
CC-Link gateway (on request)
175
AF
Sercos III gateway (on request)
176
B0
EtherCAT gateway (FX0-GETC)
192
C0
Extension module (FX0-STIO)
193
C1
Drive Monitor (FX3-MOCx)
194
C2
Extension module (FX3-XTDS)
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
The following table matches the module specific diagnostics data (as defined by the GSD)
to the appropriate error message.
The module status bits have the following significance, if not otherwise stated:
0 = Error
1 = No error
Tab. 92: PROFIBUS error
messages
Module
Diagnostics bit
number
[dec]
[Octet Bit]
1
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
Error origin
CPU
13.0
13.1
2
3
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
13.2 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4 … 13.7
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
XTIO/XTDI
PROFIBUS
gateway
Error message
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Configuration Flexi Soft system
Power supply
EFI1
EFI2
Flexi Link stations in the system
1 = All found
0 = One or more are missing
Flexi Link stations suspended
1 = None
0 = One or more
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Output Fast-Shut-Off
Reserved
Input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation
Input 3-4 dual channel input evaluation
Input 5-6 dual channel input evaluation
Input 7-8 dual channel input evaluation
Reserved
External test signal Input 1
External test signal Input 2
External test signal Input 3
External test signal Input 4
External test signal Input 5
External test signal Input 6
External test signal Input 7
External test signal Input 8
Short-circuit monitoring output 1: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 1: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 2: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 2: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 3: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 3: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 4: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 4: short-circuit to low
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
125
Chapter 6
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module
Diagnostics bit
number
[dec]
[Octet Bit]
4
5
6
7
8
0C
0F
126
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
Error origin
Error message
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
CANopen
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
DeviceNet
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Modbus gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
EtherNet/IP
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
PROFINET
gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
CC-Link gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Sercos III gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module
Diagnostics bit
number
[dec]
[Octet Bit]
10
20
21
14)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
13.0 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
13.0 … 13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
14.0 … 15.7
Error origin
Error message
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
EtherCAT gateway
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
STIO
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Reserved
Output load (overcurrent) monitoring
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
MOCx
Reserved
Reserved
User-defined status bit 114)
User-defined status bit 214)
User-defined status bit 314)
User-defined status bit 414)
Reserved
The status of this bit can be defined to suit the specific application in the MOCx logic, e.g. to indicate
inadmissible movements of an axis that have been detected by an MOCx function block.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
127
Chapter 6
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module
Diagnostics bit
number
[dec]
[Octet Bit]
22
23 … 3F
128
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4 … 13.7
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
15.0 … 15.7
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5 … 15.7
Error origin
XTDS
Other module
Error message
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Reserved
Output load (overcurrent) monitoring
Input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation
Input 3-4 dual channel input evaluation
Input 5-6 dual channel input evaluation
Input 7-8 dual channel input evaluation
Reserved
External test signal Input 1
External test signal Input 2
External test signal Input 3
External test signal Input 4
External test signal Input 5
External test signal Input 6
External test signal Input 7
External test signal Input 8
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 12.5 to 12.7
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Reserved
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.1.4
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
For information how to perform diagnostics on the Flexi Soft system please refer to the
operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK part no. 8012998).
Tab. 93: Troubleshooting for
the FX0-GPRO
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
The Flexi Soft Designer tool
does not connect to the Flexi
Soft gateway module.
FX0-GPRO has no power supply.
FX0-GPRO does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
BF Off
MS
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GPRO does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
BF Off
MS Green
FX0-GPRO does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
BF Off/ Red
MS
Green (1 Hz)
FX0-GPRO does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
BF Off
MS Green
FX0-GPRO functioned correctly
after configuration, but suddenly no longer supplies data.
PWR Green
BF Red
MS
Red/green
FX0-GPRO is in Critical fault
mode.
PWR Green
BF Red
MS
Red (2 Hz)
Configuration required.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Establish the power supply.
Check the communication settings in
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Configure the FX0-GPRO and download
the configuration to the device.
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
FX0-GPRO/Flexi Soft System is
in Critical fault mode
PWR Red
BF Off
MS Red
FX0-GPRO is not plugged properly
into the other Flexi Soft module.
Module connecting plug is soiled or
damaged.
Other Flexi Soft module has
internal critical error.
No data set is activated.
Activate at least one data set.
FX0-GPRO is in Idle mode.
CPU/application is stopped. Start CPU
(change into Run state)
PROFIBUS master is in stop mode.
Set PROFIBUS master into Run state.
FX0-GPRO PROFIBUS hardware
address is changed.
PROFIBUS cable is disconnected.
Check PROFIBUS address setting at
hardware address.
Check PROFIBUS cable.
Check PROFIBUS master.
FX0-GPRO internal device error
CPU firmware version does not
support Flexi Soft gateways.
Switch off the power supply of the Flexi
Soft system and switch it on again.
Check the diagnostics messages with
Flexi Soft Designer.
Use a FX3-CPUx with the required
firmware version (see section 2.2
“Correct use” on page 10).
If the error remains, replace the
gateway.
Plug the FX0-GPRO in correctly.
Clean the connecting socket/plug.
Repower the system.
Check the other Flexi Soft modules.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
129
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2
CANopen gateway
The following Flexi Soft gateway can be used for CANopen: FX0-GCAN.
6.2.1
Interfaces and operation
Controls and status indicators
Fig. 64: Controls and status
indicators FX0-GCAN
Network status LED
(red/green)
Address switch 1
Module status LED
(red/green)
Baud rate DIP switch
CANopen connection
LED
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
NS (Network Status)
Tab. 94: Meaning of the
status LEDs of the FX0-GCAN
PWR
(Power)
Power LED (green)
Address switch 2
Meaning
No power supply
Green
Operational, power supply switched on
Red
System error
CANopen status: Stopped (except node guarding and
heartbeat, if active)
Green
Green
Red
Red (1 Hz)
CANopen status: Operational (PDO + SDO data exchange)
CANopen status: Pre-operational (SDO data exchange only)
CAN bus off (hardware problem CAN physical layer) or
Error passive
Node guarding failed (NMT master does not monitor slave
anymore) or Heartbeat consumer failure
MS (Module Status)
Power-up
Green
Executing, FLEXBUS+ and PDO status: all “Good”
Green
Idle (cable not attached or node guarding failed)
Red/green
Executing, FLEXBUS+ and PDO status: any is “Bad”
Red
Critical fault, caused by emergency bit
Red (1 Hz)
Configuration required or in progress
Red (2 Hz)
Critical fault, caused by gateway itself
For diagnostics see section 6.2.14 “Diagnostics and troubleshooting” on page 159.
130
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
How to set the CANopen address via hardware address switches:
Set the CANopen address using the hardware address switches on the device front.
Then switch the Flexi Soft system off and back on again.
Tab. 95: Address switch
FX0>GCAN
Switch
Function
Address switch 1
× 10
10 position rotary switch for setting the module address (tens)
Address switch 2
×1
10 position rotary switch for setting the module address (ones)
How to set the baud rate via hardware DIP switches:
Set the baud rate using the DIP switches on the device. Then switch the Flexi Soft
system off and back on again.
Fig. 65: DIP switch settings
on the FX0-GCAN
Tab. 96: DIP switch settings
on the FX0-GCAN
Notes
Baud rate kbit/s
125
250
500
800
1000
Baud rate [kbit/s]
DIP 1
DIP 2
DIP 3
DIP 4
125
On
On
On
Off
250
Off
On
On
Off
500
On
Off
On
Off
800
Off
Off
On
Off
1000
On
On
Off
Off
All other DIP switch settings will set the baud rate to 125 kbit/s.
If the address switches on the device are set to “00”, the DIP switch settings are
ignored and the baud rate setting in the Flexi Soft Designer is used.
How to set the CANopen address and baud rate via software using the Flexi Soft
Designer:
Set the two hardware address switches on the device front to “00”.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
CANopen gateway. Ensure that your project is offline.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GCAN or
double click the FX0-GCAN in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
131
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 66: Setting the CANopen
address for the FX0-GCAN
Select the CANopen address in the CANopen address field.
Select the baud rate in the CANopen baud rate field.
Click Connect to go online and transfer the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Notes
The address that can be set via the hardware address switch ranges from 1 … 99.
The address that can be set via the Flexi Soft Designer software ranges from 1 … 127.
The CANopen master cannot overwrite the address.
If the CANopen address and the baud rate are set using the Flexi Soft Designer, the
settings will become effective immediately after transferring the configuration (i.e.
without switching off and switching on the Flexi Soft system). Exception: If the system is
in bus off state, a power cycle is required.
Plug assignment
The connection to the CANopen fieldbus is made using a 5 pin open style connector.
Fig. 67: Open style connector
and assignment FX0-GCAN
Pin
Description
5
–
–
4
H CAN_H
CAN High
3
DR (CAN_SHLD)
Screen connection (optional)
2
L CAN_L
CAN Low
1
–
–
Bus cable
CANopen is based on a linear topology with screened, twisted pair 2 core cable and terminating resistors at both ends of the bus. The screen is connected to ground at both ends.
The transmission rate, depending on the network length, is between 125 kbit/s and
1000 kbit/s. The possible network lengths are 20 m at 1000 kbit/s up to 500 m at
125 kbit/s.
132
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 68: CANopen bus cable
Node
Note
120 F
terminating
resistor
It is not necessary to connect a voltage supply (pin 1/5) to the FX0-GCAN.
The following maximum physical sizes are possible for the network:
Tab. 97: Maximum cable
lengths FX0-GCAN
Baud rate [kbit/s]
Max. cable length [m]
125
500
250
250
500
100
800
40
1000
20
EDS file
The device characteristics are described using the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS), which
every standard bus configuration tool uses.
You will find the EDS file and device icon for PLC interfacing …
in the Internet on the FX0-GCAN product page.
in the Flexi Soft Designer program folder on your hard disk (default installation folder is
“C:\programs\SICK\FlexiSoft\DeviceDescriptions\...”).
6.2.2
Note
CANopen configuration of the gateway — How the data are transferred
This document does not cover the creation of the CANopen network or the rest of the automation system project in the network configuration tool. It is assumed the CANopen project has already been set up in the configuration program, e.g. 3S Software CoDeSys 2.x.
Examples refer to configurations performed with CoDeSys 2.3.
The following steps need to be taken in order to configure the communication between
PLC and gateway.
Step 1: Install the electronic data sheet (EDS file)
Before the FX0-GCAN can be used as device in the network configuration tool, e.g.
CoDeSys 2.3, for the first time, the electronic data sheet (EDS file) of the gateway must be
installed into the hardware catalogue of the tool.
Download the EDS file and device icon from www.sick.com, on the FX0-GCAN product
page.
Follow the instructions in the online help or in the user manual of the CANopen network
configuration tool for installing EDS files.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
133
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Example — How to install the EDS file using CoDeSys 2.3:
Open the PLC Configuration editor window.
Fig. 69: CoDeSys PLC
Configuration editor window
From the Extras menu choose the command Add configuration file.... A file selection
dialog opens.
Select the EDS file for the FX0-GCAN and click on the Open button.
Step 2: Add the gateway to the controller
In order to have the Flexi Soft system data available in the PLC process image, the gateway must be added to the hardware configuration first. The procedure associated with this
depends on the hardware configuration program of the PLC being used. On this topic,
please also read the documentation for the corresponding program.
Example — How to add the FX0-GCAN using CoDeSys 2.3:
Open the PLC Configuration editor window and select the controller.
Right click on the controller to open the context menu or open the Insert menu.
Fig. 70: Appending a
CanMaster using
CoDeSys 2.3
In either menu, under Append Subelement, choose CanMaster.... A CanMaster is
added to the controller.
Now select the CanMaster.
Right click on the CanMaster to open the context menu or open the Insert menu.
134
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 71: Appending the FX0GCAN using CoDeSys 2.3
In either menu, under Append Subelement, choose FX0-GCAN00000 (EDS)... to
append the FX0-GCAN to the CanMaster.
Step 3: Select and configure the process data objects (PDOs)
After adding the device to the automation network it is required to configure which of the
process data objects will be used and how they will be transmitted.
Example — How to define the PDO transmission type using CoDeSys 2.3:
In the PLC Configuration editor window select the FX0-GCAN. Then click on the Send
PDO-Mapping tab on the right side.
Fig. 72: PDO configuration
using CoDeSys 2.3
Select one of the displayed PDOs (e.g. PDO 1) and click on the Properties button. The
PDO properties dialog opens.
Fig. 73: PDO properties
dialog in CoDeSys 2.3
Select the desired Transmission Type for the PDO from the selection list, enter the
Event-Time in ms and click OK. For more information please refer to section “TxPDO
transmission types” on page 149 and to the manual for your CANopen system configuration software.
Repeat this for the other Send-PDOs as well as for the Receive-PDOs.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
135
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2.3
CANopen configuration of the gateway — Which data are transferred
Each CANopen device stores its data in objects that are listed in the object dictionary. Service data objects (SDOs) mainly contain the CANopen configuration data, while the process
data are stored in process data objects (PDOs). Communication objects are used to read
and write these SDOs and PDOs as well as to control the devices. A detailed description of
the different objects will be given in the following sections.
Predefined connection set (PCS)
The predefined connection set provides a simple CAN identifier structure. The FX0-GCAN
gateway provides communication objects that can be addressed or sent using these CAN
identifiers.
The PCS comprises 2 broadcast objects (NMT and SYNC) and a total of 12 peer-to-peer objects. Each of these objects has a unique 11 bit CAN identifier that consists of a function
code and a device address. The device address for the broadcast objects is 0, for the other
objects 1 … 127.
Tab. 98: CAN identifier
structure
Bit number
10
9
8
7
Function code
Tab. 99: PCS communication
objects
Object
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Device address
CAN identifier
Meaning
NMT
00h
Network management
SYNC
80h
Sync message
EMERGENCY
081h … 0FFh
Status message
TxPDO1
181h … 1FFh
Send process data object 1
RxPDO1
201h … 27Fh
Receive process data object 1
TxPDO2
281h … 2FFh
Send process data object 2
RxPDO2
301h … 37Fh
Receive process data object 2
TxPDO3
381h … 3FFh
Send process data object 3
RxPDO3
401h … 47Fh
Receive process data object 3
TxPDO4
481h … 4FFh
Send process data object 4
RxPDO4
501h … 57Fh
Receive process data object 4
TxSDO
581h … 5FFh
Send service data object
RxSDO
601h … 67Fh
Receive service data object
NMT-ErrorControl
701h … 77Fh
Node guarding
Broadcast objects
Peer-to-peer objects
Each object starts with its CAN identifier, followed by the RTR bit (Remote Transmission
Request), followed by the Data Length Code (DLC), followed by 0 to 8 data bytes. The DLC
(4 bits) indicates the number of data bytes.
136
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2.4
NMT — Network management
The NMT broadcast object is used to start, stop or initialise CANopen devices. For this
purpose one device in the CANopen network must take over the role of the NMT master.
Usually this is the PLC. All other devices are regarded as NMT slaves. NMT services are
broadcast services, for which the slaves do not generate a reply.
All NMT objects start with the CAN ID 00h.
Broadcast service for an NMT slave with address N:
Tab. 100: Network management for one NMT slave with
address N
CAN ID
00h
DLC
2
DATA
OP
N
Broadcast service for all NMT slaves:
Tab. 101: Network management for all NMT slaves
CAN ID
00h
DLC
2
DATA
OP
0
OP
NMT operation
Explanation
80h
Change to “Pre-Operational”
01h
Change to “Operational”
02h
Change to “Prepared/Stopped”
81h
Change to “Reset Node”
82h
Change to “Reset Communication”
After booting an NMT slave automatically enters the PreOperational state. In this state, communication is allowed via
SDO, but not via PDO. The NMT slave can be changed from
another state to this state.
The Operational state is reached from the Pre-Operational
state. In this state communication via PDO is possible and
the CANopen slave reacts to Sync commands.
Note: On transition to NMT Operational state, each slave
sends a TxPDO with the transmission type = 255, so that the
NMT master is informed of the current input configuration.
Communication via SDO or PDO is not possible in this state,
and there is also no reaction to SYNC commands.
Triggers a re-initialisation of the CANopen functionality in the
NMT slave.
Triggers a re-initialisation of the CANopen functionality in the
NMT slave; the toggle bit for Node guarding is set to 0.
Example for resetting all communication:
The following NMT object (CAN ID = 00h) has 2 data bytes (DLC = 2). Data byte 1 contains
the “Reset communication” command (82h) while data byte 2 addresses this command to
all devices in the CANopen network (address = 0):
Tab. 102: Example NMT
object for resetting all
communication
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
CAN ID
00h
DLC
2
DATA
82h
0
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
137
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2.5
SYNC
The SYNC command causes all TxPDOs for a CANopen slave to be sent. It is therefore
possible to poll the slave using SYNC.
Tab. 103: Polling inputs using
SYNC
CAN ID
80h
DLC
DATA
0
The slave sends all input values when this message arrives. All TxPDOs are sent.
To ensure the slave automatically sends the actual input values on the receipt of a SYNC
command, the transmission type for the related PDOs must be set to 1 (cyclic, synchronous). In addition, the operating mode of the device must be “Operational”.
It is possible to change the transmission type for the TxPDOs using the SDOs
1800 … 1803 (PDO communication parameter) and the sub-object 2. Allowed are the
following types:
acyclic/synchronous = 0
cyclic/synchronous = 1 … 240
acyclic by device profile = 255 (only for TxPDO 1 … 4, digital inputs)
6.2.6
Emergency
A CANopen slave with the address N sends an emergency message to inform the other
devices about an error state.
Tab. 104: Emergency
messages
CAN ID
DLC
80h + N
8
ErrL, ErrH
DATA
ErrL
ErrH
Err-Reg
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Emergency error code, 16 bit low byte/high byte
7001h … 7003h: Generic error
138
Err-Reg
Error register, CANopen object SDO 1001h
M1
Module number of the module causing the error (see Tab. 105)
M2 … M5
4 bytes module specific status bits (see Tab. 105). Active bits are
high (=“1”)
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
The following table matches the module specific diagnostics data to the appropriate error
message.
Tab. 105: CANopen
emergency messages
Module no. Diagnostics bit
(M1)
(M2 … M5)
01
02
03
04
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12 … 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
Emergency
origin
CPU
XTIO/XTDI
PROFIBUS
gateway
CANopen
gateway
Emergency message
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration Flexi Soft system
Power supply
EFI1
EFI2
Flexi Link stations in the system
1 All
found
Flexi
Link
stations suspended
1
N
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Output Fast-Shut-Off
Reserved
Input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation
Input 3-4 dual channel input evaluation
Input 5-6 dual channel input evaluation
Input 7-8 dual channel input evaluation
Reserved
External test signal Input 1
External test signal Input 2
External test signal Input 3
External test signal Input 4
External test signal Input 5
External test signal Input 6
External test signal Input 7
External test signal Input 8
Short-circuit monitoring output 1: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 1: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 2: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 2: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 3: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 3: short-circuit to low
Short-circuit monitoring output 4: short-circuit to high
Short-circuit monitoring output 4: short-circuit to low
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
139
Chapter 6
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module no. Diagnostics bit
(M1)
05
06
07
08
0C
0F
10
140
(M2 … M5)
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07 … 31
Emergency
Emergency message
origin
DeviceNet
gateway
Modbus gateway
EtherNet/IP
gateway
PROFINET
gateway
CC-Link gateway
Sercos III gateway
EtherCAT gateway
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Communication from the network
Communication to the network
Reserved
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module no. Diagnostics bit
(M1)
20
21
22
23 … 3F
Note
15)
Subject to change without notice
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08 … 11
12
13
14
15
16 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12 … 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24 … 31
00
01
02
03
04
05 … 31
Emergency
Emergency message
origin
STIO
MOCx
XTDS
Other module
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Reserved
Output load (overcurrent) monitoring
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Encoder 1
Encoder 2
Reserved
Reserved
User-defined status bit 115)
User-defined status bit 215)
User-defined status bit 315)
User-defined status bit 415)
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Outputs power supply
Reserved
Output load (overcurrent) monitoring
Input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation
Input 3-4 dual channel input evaluation
Input 5-6 dual channel input evaluation
Input 7-8 dual channel input evaluation
Reserved
External test signal Input 1
External test signal Input 2
External test signal Input 3
External test signal Input 4
External test signal Input 5
External test signal Input 6
External test signal Input 7
External test signal Input 8
Reserved
Operating state Run
Internal tests
Summary of bits 05 to 07
Reserved
Configuration of this module is valid
Reserved
The diagnostics bit assignment for M2 to M5 is as follows:
Tab. 106: CANopen
emergency, diagnostic bits
M2 to M5
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
(M2 … M5)
Bit 0
Bit 1
…
Bit 7
Bit 8
…
Bit31
M5.0
M5.1
…
M5.7
M4.0
…
M2.7
The status of this bit can be defined to suit the specific application in the MOCx logic, e.g. to indicate
inadmissible movements of an axis that have been detected by an MOCx function block.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
141
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2.7
Node guarding
An NMT master (e.g. a PLC with integrated CANopen master) uses the NMT error control
object to detect a failure of an NMT slave with the address N. The NMT slave must reply
within the node guarding time to the request from the NMT master. The node guarding
time must be monitored by the NMT master.
The NMT master sends a CAN message with identifier <700h + node ID> and RTR bit
(remote transmission request).
NMT master request:
Tab. 107: Request from NMT
master
CAN ID
700h + N
RTR
DLC
1
0
DATA
The slave (e.g. the FX0-GCAN) then sends a status byte Byte1 with the following content:
Slave response:
Tab. 108: Response from
slave
CAN ID
700h + N
Tab. 109: Remote transmission request
Bit
7
6…0
DLC
1
DATA
Byte1
Meaning
Toggle bit, changes value between two sequential requests
NMT status
4 = Stopped
5 = Operational
127 = Pre-operational
Bootup
On bootup, the gateway sends a bootup message with the CAN ID 700h+N, DLC = 1 and
Byte 1 = 0.
Heartbeat producer
If the gateway is configured as heartbeat producer (i.e. if SDO 1017 contains a value for
the producer heartbeat time, see Tab. 119 “Supported SDOs” on page 146), it sends a
cyclic message with the CAN ID 700h+N, DLC = 1 and Byte 1 = 05h. The toggle bit (Bit 7)
is always 0.
Heartbeat consumer
If the gateway is configured as heartbeat consumer (i.e. if SDO 1016.1 contains a value for
the consumer heartbeat time, see Tab. 119 “Supported SDOs” on page 146), at least one
node guarding message must be received within the configured consumer heartbeat time
(typically from an NMT master).
142
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2.8
PDO communication
Process data objects (PDOs) are the real time objects of the CANopen fieldbus. They are
sent without protocol overhead, i.e. no confirmation is sent from the receiver.
The FX0-GCAN provides four transmit process data objects (TxPDO) containing the operational data to be sent into the network and four receive process data objects (RxPDO)
containing the operational data received from the network.
CANopen objects are addressed via 11-bit CAN identifiers. As a default, the used CAN
identifier for each object derives from the object type and the configured CANopen device
address. The CAN identifiers used for the PDOs can be changed using the SDOs 1400 to
1403 for the RxPDOs and SDOs 1800 to 1803 for the TxPDOs (“PDO linking”).
Notes
Each process data object contains 8 bytes.
The contents of the process data objects are freely selectable, but are preconfigured in
the Flexi Soft Designer configuration software as follows:
Tab. 110: Default content of
the transmit process data
objects (TxPDOs) of the
FX0>GCAN
PDO#1
PDO#2
PDO#3
PDO#4
Input data set 1
Input data set 2
Input data set 3
Input data set 4
Input values
module 5
Input values
module 6
Input values
module 7
Input values
module 8
Input values
module 9
Input values
module 10
Input values
module 11
Input values
module 12
Output values
module 1
Output values
module 2
Output values
module 3
Output values
module 4
Output values
module 5
Output values
module 6
Output values
module 7
Output values
module 8
Output values
module 9
Output values
module 10
Output values
module 11
Output values
module 12
Gateway direct output
values 0
Gateway direct output
values 1
Gateway direct output
values 2
Gateway direct output
values 3
Byte 0
Logic result 0
Byte 1
Logic result 1
Byte 2
Logic result 2
Byte 3
Logic result 3
Byte 4
Input values
module 1
Input values
module 2
Input values
module 3
Input values
module 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
For detailed information about the content of the process image please see section 3.3
“Data transmitted into the network (input data sets)” on page 14.
For further information on how to configure the process image, see chapter 7 “Layout and
content of the process image” on page 172 and the Flexi Soft Designer operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012998).
Notes
The process data can also be written and read using service data objects SDO 6000
and SDO 6200 (see section 6.2.9 “SDO communication” on page 145). The simple SDO
access is recommended for diagnostic purposes. In normal operation the faster PDO
communication should be used.
After startup or after a configuration change has been performed (either via the
CANopen master or via the Flexi Soft Designer), the CANopen gateway’s MS LED flashes
Red/green until an initial transmit/receive PDO or SDO 6000/SDO 6200 data
exchange on the CANopen network has happened.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
143
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
TxPDO 1…4
A transmit PDO transports data from the CANopen gateway to a CANopen device.
Tab. 111: TxPDO 1…4
CAN ID
DLC
Data
181-1FF
8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
281-2FF
8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
381-3FF
8
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
481-4FF
8
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B1…B32: CAN telegram bytes as mapped into the network input data using the Flexi Soft
Designer software (see 7.3 “Customizing the operational data (Flexi Soft to Network)” on
page 174).
The gateway sends one or more TxPDOs if at least one of the following occurs:
At least one input or output byte has changed its value and the transmission type for
the TxPDO containing this byte has the value 255.
At least one input or output byte has changed its value and the gateway receives a Sync
command and at least one TxPDO has the transmission type 0.
If the transmission type is n = 1…240, n Sync commands are required for the TxPDO to
be sent.
The transmission type for a TxPDO is 254 or 255 and the event timer (SDO 1800,5 for
TxPDO1) has a value N > 0. In this case this TxPDO is sent every N ms.
A TxPDO can also be polled via remote transmission request (RTR). This requires a CAN
telegram to the gateway containing the CAN ID of the desired TxPDO with DLC = 0 and
RTR = 1.
For all transmission methods the device operating mode must be set to “Operational” (see
Tab. 101 “Network management for all NMT slaves” on page 137).
RxPDO 1…4
A receive PDO transports data from a CANopen device to the CANopen gateway.
Tab. 112: RxPDO 1…4
CAN ID
DLC
Data
201-1FF
8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
301-2FF
8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
401-3FF
8
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
501-4FF
8
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B1…B32: CAN telegram bytes as mapped into the gateway input data using the Flexi Soft
Designer software.
The transmission type 255 is pre-set for all RxPDOs. This means that the gateway forwards
the received RxPDO data immediately to the main module. This setting cannot be changed.
144
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2.9
SDO communication
SDOs are Service Data Objects. They contain a wide variety of data. These include, among
other items, data on the planning or input and output data. Unlike the PDO communication, each reception of an SDO is answered at protocol level, i.e. the receiving device
sends a confirmation.
In this CANopen PCS implementation the following protocols are supported:
SDO download expedited (write SDO)
SDO upload expedited (read SDO)
Upload SDO segment protocol (segmented reading of an SDO)
SDO download expedited (write SDO)
The client sends a request message to server N. The 16 bit index and the sub-index for the
SDO to be written are coded in this message. In addition, the request also contains 4 data
bytes with the data to be written.
Tab. 113: Write SDO
CAN ID
DLC
600h + N
8
Data
23h
SDO_L
SDO_H
SUB
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
SDO_L = SDO index low byte
SDO_H = SDO index high byte
SUB
= SDO sub-index
The server then replies with a confirmation message:
Tab. 114: Write SDO
confirmation
CAN ID
580h + N
DLC
8
Data
60h
SDO_L
SDO_H
SUB
Byte 1
Byte 1 to 4 in the write confirmation message contain zeros.
SDO upload expedited (Read SDO)
The client requests the contents of an SDO with a request message to server N. The 16 bit
index and the sub-index for the SDO to be read are coded in this message. Byte 1 to 4 in
the read request message contain zeros.
Tab. 115: Read SDO
CAN ID
600h + N
DLC
8
Data
40h
SDO_L
SDO_H
SUB
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
The server will reply with the following message. Byte 1 to 4 contain the value of the
requested object.
Tab. 116: Read SDO
confirmation
CAN ID
580h + N
DLC
8
Data
43h
SDO_L
SDO_H
SUB
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
CANopen data types UDINT and UINT
In order to transfer data types UDINT or UINT, the data must be in Intel format. E.g. the
32 bit value 12345678h must be transferred in the data bytes 5, 6, 7 and 8 in the
following order: [5] = 78, [6] = 56, [7] = 34, [8] = 12.
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
This applies also to the SDO index in data byte 2 and 3 which has the data type UINT. I.e.
the low byte is transferred in data byte 2 and the high byte is transferred in data byte 3.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
145
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Example: The following messages are necessary to read the SDO 1003,1 of the CANopen
device with device address 2. The data type of the data to be read is UDINT.
The client sends:
Tab. 117: Example —
Read SDO
CAN ID
DLC
602h
8
Data
40h
03h
10h
01h
00h
00h
00h
00h
08h
00h
50h
02h
The server responds:
Tab. 118: Example —
Read SDO confirmation
CAN ID
DLC
582h
8
Data
43h
03h
10h
01h
The response data combine to the 32 bit word 02500008h.
6.2.10
SDO object directory
Every CANopen device manages its SDOs in an object directory. The complete object directory is formally described in an EDS file. Many CANopen tools can read this EDS file and as
a result know the object characteristics of the CANopen device.
In the following table, all SDOs for the FX0-GCAN gateway are shown.
Tab. 119: Supported SDOs
SDO #
Type
1000
Device type
1001
Error register
1003
Error list (error history)
1005
COB ID SYNC
1008
Device name
1009
Hardware version
100A
Software version
100C
Guard time
100D
Life time factor
1014
COB ID EMCY (available version V1.30.0 or higher)
1016
Consumer heartbeat time
1017
Producer heartbeat time
1018
Identity record
1027
Module list
1400…1403
RxPDO 1…4 communication parameters
1600…1603
RxPDO 1…4 mapping parameters
1800…1803
TxPDO 1…4 communication parameters
1A00…1A03
TxPDO 1…4 mapping parameters
3100
Module status bits
3200
Config CRC array
3300
Module type code array
6000
Process data input objects
6200
Process data output objects
You can find more detailed information on these SDOs in the CANopen draft standard
DS 301 V4.02 (DSP 301 V4.1).
146
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
SDO 1001: Error register
The error register (SINT) contains an error bit indicating whether an error is present. If bit 0
is set to 1, a “generic error” has been detected.
SDO 1003: Error list (error history)
SDO 1003 is an array containing the last 10 error codes that have been reported by the
gateway via emergency message. Array index 0 contains the number of error codes that
have been recorded in SDO 1003.
A new error will be recorded in index 1, while older errors will be renumbered (increased
by 1). The array index can be overwritten externally with a 0, which will clear the array
completely.
Notes
Not all errors that are reported via emergency message will be recorded in SDO 1003,
but only the errors listed in Tab. 105.
Entries in SDO 1003 are UDINT and normally divided in 16 bit error code and 16 bit
additional information. In case of an emergency, the module status diagnostics (4 byte)
are entered here.
SDO 1005: COB ID SYNC
SDO 1005 contains the COB ID of the Sync object. As a default this value is 80h, but it can
be changed.
Note
When you change the COB ID of the Sync object, keep in mind that the new ID must not be
assigned to another communication object already.
SDO 1008: Device name
SD0 1008 contains a device name (VISIBLE STRING).
Note
This SDO can not be read using a simple “SDO upload expedited”. Instead, the “Upload
SDO segment protocol” (client command specifier ccs = 3) must be used as described in
the CANopen specification DS 301.
SDO 1009: Hardware version
SDO 1009 contains the current hardware version of the device (VISIBLE STRING).
Note
This SDO can not be read using a simple “SDO upload expedited”. Instead, the “Upload
SDO segment protocol” (client command specifier ccs = 3) must be used as described in
the CANopen specification DS 301.
SDO 100A: Software version
SDO 100A contains the current software version of the device (VISIBLE STRING).
Note
This SDO can not be read using a simple “SDO upload expedited”. Instead, the “Upload
SDO segment protocol” (client command specifier ccs = 3) must be used as described in
the CANopen specification DS 301.
SDO 100C: Guard time
The product of guard time (UINT) and life time factor (SINT) results in the life guarding
time.
Life guarding time (ms) = guard time (ms) × life time factor
The master must send a node guarding message to the slave at least once during the life
guarding time. If the life guarding time is exceeded (life-guarding error), the gateway generates a cable break error and sets all process data coming from the network to 0; the
NS LED will start flashing
Red.
Life guarding is activated in the slave by the first node guarding message if the set life
guarding time is not 0. If after activation of the life guarding the guard time or the life time
factor is set to 0, life guarding is deactivated. See also section 6.2.11 “Guarding protocols”
on page 153.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
147
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
SDO 100D: Life time factor
SDO 100D contains the life time factor (SINT). See SDO 100C.
Note
The life time factor must be either = 0 (disabled) or O 1.5.
SDO 1016: Consumer heartbeat time
The gateway is configured as a heartbeat consumer if SDO 1016 contains a value higher
than 0 for the consumer heartbeat time. The consumer heartbeat time is defined in ms.
The NMT master must send at least one node guarding message to the slave within this
time. If the consumer heartbeat time is exceeded (life-guarding error), the gateway generates a cable break error and sets all process data coming from the network to 0; the
NS LED will start flashing
Red.
SDO 1017: Producer heartbeat time
The gateway can also function as a heartbeat producer, i.e. send a heartbeat signal. This
allows another device to detect whether the heartbeat producer (i.e. the gateway) is still
working correctly.
The producer heartbeat time is defined in ms. For internal processing it is rounded to the
next higher multiple of 4. If the heartbeat time is set to 0, the heartbeat signal is
deactivated.
The heartbeat signal consists of a cyclic CAN message with the identifier 700h + device
address.
Note
It is not possible to use heartbeat signals and life guarding messages at the same time
because both functions use the same CAN identifier.
See also section 6.2.11 “Guarding protocols” on page 153.
SDO 1018: Identity record
This SDO contains basic information about the gateway.
Tab. 120: SDO 1018
contents
Subindex
Mapping
Format
Description
1
Vendor ID
UDINT
Unique identification of the
manufacturer (e.g. SICK)
2
Product code
UDINT
Device variant
3
Revision number
UDINT
Software version of the device
4
Serial number
UDINT
Serial number of the device
SDO 1027: Module list
The module list contains the module type and the module ID of all Flexi Soft modules in
the system.
Tab. 121: SDO 1027
contents
Subindex
Module
Format
Main module (FX3-CPUx)
SINT
2…13
Extension modules (XTIO, XTDI or MOCx)
SINT
14, 15
Gateways
SINT
1
You can find the module types and module IDs in Tab. 105. The return value for free
module slots is 0.
148
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
SDO 1400…1403: RxPDO communication parameters
Using SDO 1400 to 1403 the communication parameters for the RxPDOs 1 to 4 are
configured. E.g. SD0 1400 defines the parameters for RxPDO 1 etc.
Tab. 122: SDO 1400…1403
contents
Subindex
Mapping
Format
Description
1
COB ID
UDINT
CAN identifier for this PDO, read-only
2
Receive mode
SINT
Fix 255 (asynchronous mode)
The receive mode (read-write) defines how the PDO shall be received. For the RxPDOs the
receive mode is set to 255 (asynchronous mode). In this mode the data of a received
RxPDO will be routed immediately to the outputs.
Note
If the receive mode is set to another value than 255, an error code is generated (abort
code 0609 0030h, invalid parameter value).
SDO 1600…1603: RxPDO mapping parameters
This SDO can not be used since the RxPDO mapping is done using the Flexi Soft Designer.
See also Tab. 110 and Tab. 112.
SDO 1800…1803: TxPDO communication parameters
Using SDO 1800 to 1803 the communication parameters for the TxPDOs 1 to 4 are
configured. E.g. SD0 1800 defines the parameters for TxPDO 1 etc.
Tab. 123: SDO 1800…1803
contents
Subindex
Mapping
Format
Description
1
COB ID
UDINT
CAN identifier for this PDO, read-only
2
Transmission type
SINT
Defines when the PDO is to be sent
5
Event timer
UINT
In ms
The transmission type is set to 255 (asynchronous mode, event triggered) as a default for
all TxPDOs.
The event timer contains the rate in ms for the cyclic transmission of the TxPDO.
TxPDO transmission types
Tab. 124: TxPDO
transmission types
Note
TxPDO
Synchronous
Asynchronous
RTR
1, 2, 3, 4
0, 1…240
254, 255
253
If the transmission type is set to an invalid value, an error code is generated (abort code
0609 0030h, invalid parameter value).
Synchronous: The synchronous transmission type 0 means that the TxPDO will be sent
after the reception of a Sync message, but only if data has changed. The synchronous
transmission types n = 1…240 define that the TxPDO will be sent after the reception of the
th
n Sync message.
Asynchronous, event triggered on change of state: The asynchronous transmission type
255 (without configured event timer) means that the TxPDO will be sent each time if at
least one input bit has changed that has been mapped on this PDO.
Asynchronous, event triggered on timer event: The asynchronous transmission type
254/255 (with configured event timer) defines that the TxPDO will be sent each time the
event timer has expired. E.g. a value of 500 for the event timer means that the gateway
will send the corresponding TxPDO each 500 ms.
RTR, on request: The transmission type 253 defines that the TxPDO can be polled via RTR
(remote transmission request). This requires a CAN message with DLC = 0, RTR = 1 and
the COB ID of the TxPDO to the gateway. The gateway will then respond with the requested
TxPDO.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
149
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
SDO 1A00…1A03: TxPDO mapping parameters
This SDO can not be used since the TxPDO mapping is done using the Flexi Soft Designer.
See also Tab. 110 and Tab. 111.
SDO 3100: Module status bits
SDO 3100 contains the module status bits from the Flexi Soft system (see Tab. 105).
Active bits are low (=“0”).
Tab. 125: SDO 3100
contents
Note
SDO array
Data set parameter
Module
Size
3100,1
Module status module 0
CPUx
UDINT
3100,2
Module status module 1
Extension
UDINT
…
…
…
…
3100,14
Module status module 13
Gateway
UDINT
3100,15
Module status module 14
Gateway
UDINT
The module positions in the Flexi Soft Designer are numbered from 0 to 14. Therefore the
subindex for SDO 3100 is = module position + 1.
SDO 3100 is read-only.
SDO 3200: Config CRC array
SDO 3200 contains the Flexi Soft checksums in UDINT format.
150
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
SDO 3300: Module type code array
SDO 3300 contains the type codes of the max. 15 modules in the Flexi Soft system in SINT
format (8 bytes per module = 120 bytes). See the following table for details.
Tab. 126: Module type codes
in SDO 3300
Byte
Bit
Value
0
0-3
System
07h
4-7
1
2-6
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
0-7
0-7
Short
Designation
FX
Flexi Soft controller
Safety category
00h
0
None
01h
1
SIL1
02h
2
SIL2
03h
3
SIL3
Module type
00h
CPU0
Main module of the Flexi Soft safety controller
01h
CPU1
Main module of the Flexi Soft safety controller with EFI
02h
CPU2
Main module of the Flexi Soft safety controller
with EFI and ACR
03h
CPU3
Main module of the Flexi Soft safety controller
with EFI, ACR and Flexi Link
04h
XTDI
Input extension module
05h
XTDS
Input/output extension module with safe inputs and
nonRsafe outputs
06h
XTIO
Input/output extension module
07h
GPRO
PROFIBUS DP gateway
08h
GDEV
DeviceNet gateway
09h
GCAN
CANopen gateway
0Ah
GENT
EtherNet/IP gateway
0Bh
GMOD
Modbus TCP gateway
0Ch
GPNT
PROFINET IO gateway
14h
GCC1
CC-Link gateway
15h
GS3S
Sercos III gateway
16h
GETC
EtherCAT gateway
20h
STIO
Input/output extension module with non-safe inputs and
non-safe outputs
21h
MOC1
Drive Monitor
24h
MOC0
Drive Monitor
FFh
Empty
No module type (empty configuration)
Internal use
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
151
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Byte
Bit
Value
Short
Designation
7
0-7
Module identification for diagnostic purposes
00h
–
–
01h
FX3-CPUxxxxxx
Main module of the Flexi Soft safety controller
02h
FX3-XTDIxxxxx
Flexi Soft extension module with safe inputs
FX3-XTIOxxxxx
Flexi Soft extension module with safe inputs
and safe outputs
03h
FX0-GPROxxxxx
Flexi Soft PROFIBUS DP gateway
04h
FX0-GCANxxxxx
Flexi Soft CANopen gateway
05h
FX0-GDEVxxxxx
Flexi Soft DeviceNet gateway
06h
FX0-GMODxxxxx
Flexi Soft Modbus TCP gateway
07h
FX0-GENTxxxxx
Flexi Soft EtherNet/IP gateway
08h
FX0-GPNTxxxxx
Flexi Soft PROFINET IO gateway
0Ch
FX0-GCC1xxxxx
Flexi Soft CC-Link standard gateway
0Fh
FX3-GS3Sxxxxx
Flexi Soft Sercos III gateway
10h
FX0-GETCxxxxx
Flexi Soft EtherCAT standard gateway
20h
FX0-STIOxxxxx
Flexi Soft extension module with non-safe
inputs and non-safe outputs
21h
FX3-MOCxxxxx
Flexi Soft Drive Monitor
22h
FX3-XTDSxxxxx
Flexi Soft extension module with safe inputs
and non-safe outputs
SDO 6000: Process data input objects
The 32 byte process input data can be written in SDO array 6000. These are the same
data as in RxPDO 1-4 (see section 6.2.8 “PDO communication” on page 143). The
mapping is as follows:
Tab. 127: Mapping table for
SDO 6000 — RxPDO 1-4
SDO 6000
RxPDO
6000,1
RxPDO 1, Byte 1
…
…
6000,8
RxPDO 1, Byte 8
6000,9-16
RxPDO 2, Byte 1-8
6000,17-24
RxPDO 3, Byte 1-8
6000,25-32
RxPDO 4, Byte 1-8
SDO 6000 is write-only.
152
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
SDO 6200: Process data output objects
The 32 byte process output data can be read from SDO array 6200. These are the same
data as in TxPDO 1-4 (see section 6.2.8 “PDO communication” on page 143). The mapping
is as follows:
Tab. 128: Mapping table for
SDO 6200 — TxPDO 1-4
SDO 6200
TxPDO
6200,1
TxPDO 1, Byte 1
…
…
6200,8
TxPDO 1, Byte 8
6200,9-16
TxPDO 2, Byte 1-8
6200,17-24
TxPDO 3, Byte 1-8
6200,25-32
TxPDO 4, Byte 1-8
SDO 6200 is read-only.
6.2.11
Guarding protocols
CANopen provides several possibilities for actively monitoring the correct function of the
fieldbus interface (e.g. cable break detection).
Always use either node guarding or heartbeat!
WARNING
According to the CIA CANopen specification DS 301 guarding is mandatory. Please activate
either node guarding or heartbeat. If no guarding is configured the Flexi Soft system can
not detect an interruption of the CANopen communication, e.g. a broken network cable. In
this case the CANopen gateway’s input and output data may be frozen.
Heartbeat
A heartbeat producer is a CANopen device that sends a cyclic heartbeat message. This
enables all other CANopen devices to detect whether the heartbeat producer is still working correctly and what is its current status. Heartbeat messages are sent in a regular time
interval, the producer heartbeat time, which can be configured using SDO 1017. The
configured 16 bit value will be rounded to the next multiple of 4 ms.
A heartbeat consumer is a CANopen device that expects a cyclic node guarding message
within a certain time interval, the consumer heartbeat time, which can be configured using
SDO 1016. If the heartbeat consumer receives no node guarding message within the
configured consumer heartbeat time, it sends a life guarding emergency message and
sets the incoming process data to 0. Additionally the gateway generates an internal “cable
break” error that can be processed by the main module.
Node guarding
Node guarding is performed by an NMT master. This can be each CANopen device that is
able to perform this function as a client. The NMT master sends a cyclic node guarding
message to the monitored device which must respond within a defined period that is monitored by the NMT master. If the monitored device does not answer within the node life
time, the NMT master regards this as a malfunction of the device and takes the appropriate measures.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
153
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Life guarding
Life guarding is performed by the gateway itself. The node life time is calculated in the
gateway from the values of SDO 100C (guard time) and SDO 100D (life time factor). If the
gateway does not receive a node guarding message at least once within this node life time
from an NMT master, the gateway generates an internal “cable break” error that can be
processed by the CPU main module and the NS LED will start flashing
Red.
Notes
Cable break detection is possible for the gateway either if life guarding is activated, i.e.
if both objects SDO 100C and SDO 100D have a value other than 0. In this case life
guarding starts when the first node guarding request is received from an NMT master
and ends if the master sends a “Reset communication”.
Alternatively, cable break detection is possible if the gateway is configured as a heartbeat consumer. In this case, the cable break detection is performed by the gateway
itself.
Heartbeat (producer) works without node guarding. In this case, the gateway can not
detect a fieldbus cable break.
Heartbeat and node guarding/life guarding can not be used simultaneously.
If the configuration is changed from activated life guarding to no life guarding or vice
versa a complete power reset of the Flexi Soft system is required to setup the CANopen
network communication properly.
The following table gives an overview of the supported guarding protocols depending on
the configuration of SDO 1016 and SDO 1017 (heartbeat), SDO 100C (guard time) and
SDO 100D (life time factor).
Tab. 129: Guarding protocol
overview and comparison
SDO
SDO
SDO
1016
1017
100C ×
100D
0
0
0
0
0
>0
>0
0
0
0
>0
0
Gateway heartbeat
Gateway
NMT master
life guarding
node guarding
Not allowed: Always use either node guarding or heartbeat!
Deactivated
Cable break
detection
Required
Cyclic heartbeat
(consumer)
Cable break
detection
Possible for other
slaves
Cyclic heartbeat
Not possible
Not possible, but
guarding as heartbeat consumer is
possible
Cable break
detection
Not possible
(producer)
Note
154
>0
>0
0
>0
>0
>0
Cyclic heartbeat
(producer and
consumer)
Not allowed
It is not useful to use heartbeat and life guarding at the same time.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.2.12
Error objects
The FX0-GCAN reports CAN specific errors (e.g. initialisation errors, cable break, CAN
communication errors) as FLEXBUS+ errors to the main module.
Module specific errors as described in Tab. 105 are reported as extended diagnostics via
the emergency object and SDO 1003.
Emergency object
The emergency producer (CANopen gateway) is triggered to send the emergency object to
the emergency consumer (any CANopen device, normally the controller) by the occurence
of CAN specific errors or an error condition as described in Tab. 105.
The emergency object is being sent as described in DS 301 (section 9.2.5):
Tab. 130: Emergency states
and transitions
Emergency state before
Transition
Module specific alarms
Emergency state after
Error free
1
Incoming error
Error occured
Error occured
2
Outgoing error, other errors
present
Error occured
Error occured
3
Incoming error, other errors
present
Error occured
Error occured
4
All errors cleared
Error free
The gateway is in one of two emergency states, either Error free or Error occured. Emergency objects are sent depending on the transitions between these two emergency states.
The error code in the emergency object shows the emergency state the gateway is in. See
also Tab. 131.
Error objects overview
CAN specific errors
Error code
FLEXBUS+
Error type
Emergency error code
Error register
M1…M5
Error
history
SDO 1003
CAN data overrun
CAN controller overrun
in Rx Fifo
4501h
Warning
8110h
11h
1, 0, 0, 0, 0
–
CAN error passive
CAN controller is in
error passive state.
4503h
Warning
8120h
11h
0, 0, 0, 0, 0
–
CAN bus off
CAN controller is in
bus off state
4504h
Warning
–
–
CAN Tx Fifo overflow
CAN controller has no
transmit ressources
4506h
Warning
8110h
11h
2, 0, 0, 0, 0
–
CAN init failed
The CAN controller
could not be initialised
CANopen life guarding
CANopen life guarding
has detected a cable
break
C507h
Critical
–
–
4508h
Warning
8130h
11h
0, 0, 0, 0, 0
–
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Result/possible remedy
CAN messages have been lost.
Bandwidth is limited.
Check CAN settings, increase baud rate,
reduce participants/traffic.
The gateway sends only recessive bits, i.e. it
sets its own messages to invalid. The reason
is either a gateway hardware error or external
data transmission interferences.
Check cabling.
Massive transmission errors. CAN controller
has disconnected from the bus. Possible
hardware defect.
Power cycle the Flexi Soft system.
CAN messages that were to be sent by the
gateway have been lost. The number of
events triggering the gateway to send CAN
messages is too high for the set baud rate.
Increase the baud rate or change the
gateway configuration.
The CAN controller/transceiver is possibly
defect.
Replace the FX0-GCAN with a new device.
Life guarding error message generated by the
gateway: Either a failure of the node guarding
or heartbeat NMT master has occurred or the
CAN cable is broken.
Check the CANopen master. Check cabling.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
155
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Module specific
Error code
Transition
Emergency error code
Error
alarms
FLEXBUS+
emergency
state chart
Error register
M1…M5
history
SDO 1003
Gateway detected
incoming error as per
trigger conditions
–
1
M2, M3, M4,
M5
See Tab. 105.
Gateway detected
outgoing error, other
errors are present
–
2
M2, M3, M4,
M5
See Tab. 105.
Gateway detected
incoming error, other
errors are present
–
3
M2, M3, M4,
M5
See Tab. 105.
All errors cleared
–
4
FF01h
81h
M1 = Module index
M2…M5 = Module
diagnostics data
FF02h
81h
M1 = Module index
M2…M5 = Module
diagnostics data
FF03h
81h
M1 = Module index
M2…M5 = Module
diagnostics data
0000h
00h
M1 = 0
M2…M5 = 0
–
Tab. 131: Error objects overview
6.2.13
CANopen diagnostics examples
Example 1: XTIO module on position 1, output Q4 stuck at high
The gateway sends an emergency message (see Tab. 104).
CAN ID
DLC
08C
8
DATA
03
FF
01
01
40
00
00
00
The gateway’s CANopen address is 12 (= C hex). The XTIO module has the position 1 in the
Flexi Soft system.
08C:
Identifier (80 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
03FF:
Error code FF03: device specific error
01:
Error register 01 of SDO 1001H
01:
Module index M1: module in position 1
40:
Module status bit 30 (bit 6 of byte M2) = 1: output 4 stuck at high (see Tab. 105)
Reading the current error from SDO 3100:
PLC request:
CAN ID
60C
DLC
8
DATA
40
00
31
60C:
Identifier (600 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
40:
Expedited upload request
02
00
00
00
00
00 31: Index 3100
02:
156
Subindex 02: module in position 1 (see Tab. 125)
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Gateway response:
CAN ID
DLC
58C
8
DATA
42
00
31
02
58C:
Identifier (580 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
42:
Upload response, data set size is not indicated
BF
FF
FF
FB
00 31: Index 3100
02:
Subindex 02: module in position 1 (see Tab. 125)
FB:
Error byte M5, bit 2 = 0: external error
BF:
Error byte M2, bit 30 = 0: output 4 stuck-at-high error
Reading the error from the error history in SDO 1003:
PLC request:
CAN ID
60C
DLC
8
DATA
40
03
10
60C:
Identifier (600 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
40:
Expedited upload request
01
00
00
00
00
01
40
00
00
00
03 10: Index 1003
01:
Subindex 01: last error
Gateway response:
CAN ID
58C
DLC
8
DATA
42
03
10
58C:
Identifier (580 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
42:
Upload response, data set size is not indicated
03 10: Index 1003
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
01:
Subindex 01: last error
40:
Module status bit 30 (bit 6 of byte M2 = 0: output 4 stuck at high
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
157
Chapter 6
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Example 2: XTDI module dual channel input error on I1/I2
The gateway sends an emergency message (see Tab. 104).
CAN ID
DLC
08C
8
DATA
03
FF
01
0C
00
00
01
00
The gateway’s CANopen address is 12 (= C hex). The XTDI module has position 12 in the
Flexi Soft system.
08C:
Identifier (80 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
03FF:
Error code FF03: device specific error
01:
Error register 01 of SDO 1001H
0C:
Module index M1: module in position 12 (C hex)
01:
Module status bit 8 (bit 0 of byte M4) = 1: input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation:
error detected (see Tab. 105)
Reading the current error using SDO 3100:
PLC request:
CAN ID
60C
DLC
8
DATA
40
00
31
60C:
Identifier (600 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
40:
Expedited upload request
0D
00
00
00
00
00 31: Index 3100
0D:
Subindex 0D = module in position 12 (module position = subindex – 1, see also
Tab. 125)
Gateway response:
CAN ID
58C
DLC
8
DATA
42
00
31
0D
58C:
Identifier (580 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
42:
Upload response, data set size is not indicated
FF
FF
FE
FB
00 31: Index 3100
158
0D:
Subindex 0D: module in position 12 (see Tab. 125)
FB:
Error byte M5, bit 2 = 0: external error
FE:
Error byte M4, bit 0 = 0: input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation: error detected
(see Tab. 105)
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Reading the error from the error history in SDO 1003:
PLC request:
CAN ID
60C
DLC
8
DATA
40
03
10
60C:
Identifier (600 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
40:
Expedited upload request
01
00
00
00
00
01
00
00
01
00
03 10: Index 1003
01:
Subindex 01: last error
Gateway response:
CAN ID
58C
DLC
8
DATA
42
03
10
58C:
Identifier (580 + C)
8:
Data length code: 8 bytes follow.
42:
Upload response, data set size is not indicated
03 10: Index 1003
01:
Subindex 01: last error
01:
Module status bit 8 (bit 0 of byte M4) = 0: input 1-2 dual channel input evaluation:
error detected
6.2.14
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
For information on how to perform diagnostics on the Flexi Soft system please refer to the
operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK part no. 8012998).
Tab. 132: Troubleshooting for
the FX0-GCAN
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Off
MS
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Green
MS
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Green
MS
Red/green
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS
Green
MS
Red/green
Configuration required, node guard
or heartbeat message have not
been sent.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Configure the FX0-GCAN and download
the configuration to the device.
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
No PDO transfer since power-up.
Start PDO transfer.
Transfer PDO via SDO 6000 or 6200.
No PDO Transfer since power-up.
False baud rate (CAN transceiver
could be in passive error).
False Node ID/CANopen address.
CAN cable has been disconnected.
FX0-GCAN does not supply PDO
data.
PWR Green
NS Off/ Red/ Green
MS
Green (1 Hz)
FX0-GCAN does not supply PDO
data.
PWR Green
NS Green
MS Off
FX0-GCAN is in Idle mode. Node
guard or heartbeat messages will
be sent.
Flexi Soft configuration is not verified and CPU module is stopped.
Supply voltage too low.
Start PDO transfer.
Transfer PDO via SDO 6000 or 6200.
Check and correct the baud rate.
Check and correct the address.
Check CANopen cabling.
CPU/application is stopped. Start CPU
(change into Run state).
Verify the configuration with Flexi Soft
Designer and start the CPU module.
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
Check supply voltage.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
159
Chapter 6
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Red
NS Red
MS Red
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS
Green (1 Hz)
MS
Green (1 Hz)
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Red
MS
Red/green
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS
Green (1 Hz)
MS Green
Supply voltage dip.
Check supply voltage.
Reset Flexi Soft system
False Node ID/CANopen address.
False baud rate (CAN transceiver
could be in passive error), FX0GCAN is in Idle mode.
Check and correct the address.
Check and correct the baud rate.
False baud rate and FX0-GCAN
transceiver is in bus off state
(hardware problem at CAN physical
layer).
CAN cable has been disconnected.
CANopen master is in stop or preoperational mode.
During initialization of the bus
system, another slave could not be
initialized.
CANopen state of FX0-GCAN is preoperational.
False Node ID/CANopen address.
Check and correct the baud rate.
Check CANopen cabling.
Reset Flexi Soft system.
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Red
MS Green
FX0-GCAN does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS
Red (1 Hz)
MS
Red/green
FX0-GCAN transceiver is in error
passive.
CAN cable has been disconnected.
FX0-GCAN is in Critical fault
mode.
PWR Green
NS Red
MS
Red (2 Hz)
FX0-GCAN internal device error.
CPU firmware version does not
support Flexi Soft gateways.
FX0-GCAN/Flexi Soft system is
in Critical fault mode
PWR Red
NS Off
MS Red
FX0-GCAN is not plugged properly
into the other Flexi Soft module.
Module connecting plug is soiled or
damaged.
Other Flexi Soft module has
internal critical error.
6.3
Node guarding or heartbeat
consumer failure.
Guarding configuration has been
changed.
Set CANopen master into Run state
(CANopen state Operational).
Check whether all slaves on the bus are
“On”.
Check CANopen cabling.
Check whether CAN master starts
automatically.
Check and correct the CANopen
address.
Check CANopen cabling.
Check the diagnostics messages with
Flexi Soft Designer.
Reset Flexi Soft system.
Check CANopen cabling.
Check life guarding time (life time
factor O 1)
Check heartbeat consumer time
(should be O 1.5 × heartbeat producer
time)
Check the diagnostics messages with
Flexi Soft Designer.
Reset Flexi Soft system.
Switch off the power supply of the Flexi
Soft system and switch it on again.
Check the diagnostics messages with
Flexi Soft Designer.
Use a FX3-CPUx with the required
firmware version (see section 2.2
“Correct use” on page 10).
If the error remains, replace the
gateway.
Plug the FX0-GCAN in correctly.
Clean the connecting socket/plug.
Repower the system.
Check the other Flexi Soft modules.
DeviceNet gateway
The following Flexi Soft gateway can be used for DeviceNet: FX0-GDEV.
6.3.1
Characteristic of the DeviceNet implementation
group 2 server (fragmented)
acknowledge handling
I/O Messaging (Polled or Change of State/Cyclic) also fragmented
baud rate adjustable via DIP switch (125 kbit/s, 250 kbit/s, 500 kbit/s)
160
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.3.2
Interfaces and operation
Controls and status indicators
Fig. 74: Controls and status
indicators FX0-GDEV
Network status LED
(red/green)
Address switch 1
Module status LED
(red/green)
Baud rate DIP switch
DeviceNet connection
LED
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
NS
(Network Status)
Tab. 133: Meaning of the
status LEDs of the FX0-GDEV
PWR
(power)
Power LED (green)
Address switch 2
Meaning
No voltage supply
Green
Operational, voltage supply switched on
Red
System error
Duplicate MAC ID check in progress
Green
Green
Red
Red (1 Hz)
Operational
No connection to the master
Duplicate MAC ID check failed
Connection timeout
MS (Module Status)
Power-up
Green
Executing, FLEXBUS+ and process data status: all “Good”
Green
Idle (cable not attached)
Red/green
Executing; FLEXBUS+ and process data status: at least one
status “Bad”
Red
Critical fault, caused by emergency bit
Red (1 Hz)
Configuration required or in progress
Red (2 Hz)
Critical fault, caused by gateway itself
For diagnostics see section 6.3.7 “Diagnostics and troubleshooting” on page 170.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
161
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
How to set the DeviceNet address via hardware address switches:
Set the DeviceNet address using the hardware address switches on the device front.
Then switch the Flexi Soft system off and back on again.
Tab. 134: Address switches
on the FX0-GDEV
Switch
× 10
×1
Notes
Function
Address switch 1
10 position rotary switch for setting the module address (ones)
Address switch 2
10 position rotary switch for setting the module address (ones)
The module addresses that can be selected using the address switches are in the
range 1-63.
If both address switches on the device are set to 0, then the address configured in
Flexi Soft Designer is used. There the address can be set in the range 0-63.
If a higher address is selected, address 63 is active.
How to set the baud rate via hardware DIP switches:
Set the baud rate using the DIP switches on the device. Then switch the Flexi Soft
system off and back on again.
Fig. 75: DIP switch settings
on the FX0-GDEV
Tab. 135: DIP switch settings
on the FX0-GDEV
Notes
Baud rate (kbit/s)
125
250
500
Baud rate [kbit/s]
DIP 1
DIP 2
DIP 3
DIP 4
125
On
On
On
Off
250
Off
On
On
Off
500
On
Off
On
Off
If all DIP switches are set to Off, then the setting for the baud rate in Flexi Soft Designer
is used.
All other DIP switch settings will set the baud rate to 125 kbit/s.
How to set the DeviceNet address and baud rate via software using the Flexi Soft
Designer:
Set both address switches to 0.
Set all DIP switches to Off.
Open the Flexi Soft Designer and load the hardware configuration including the
DeviceNet gateway. Ensure that your project is offline.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the FX0-GDEV or
double click the FX0-GDEV in the hardware configuration view to open the gateway
configuration dialog.
Click on Gateway configuration on the left hand menu. The following dialog will be
displayed:
162
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 76: Setting the DeviceNet
address of the FX0-GDEV
Select the DeviceNet address in the DeviceNet address field.
Select the baud rate in the DeviceNet baud rate field.
Click Connect to go online and transfer the configuration to the Flexi Soft system.
Notes
The address that can be set via the hardware address switch ranges from 1-63.
The address that can be set via the Flexi Soft Designer software ranges from 0-63.
The DeviceNet master cannot overwrite the address.
If the DeviceNet address and the baud rate are set using the Flexi Soft Designer, the
settings will become effective immediately after transferring the configuration (i.e.
withut switching off and switching on the Flexi Soft system). Exception: If the system is
in the Bus Off state, then you must switch off and on again the device for the changes
to become effective.
Plug assignment
The connection to the DeviceNet fieldbus is made using a 5-pin open style connector.
Fig. 77: Open style connector
and assignment FX0-GDEV
Pin
Description
5
V+ (24 V)
Voltage supply
4
H CAN_H
DeviceNet High
3
DR (CAN_SHLD)
Screen connection (optional)
2
L CAN_L
DeviceNet Low
1
V– (GND)
GND/0V
Bus cable
DeviceNet is based on CAN and is therefore a 2-wire bus system to which all bus users are
connected in parallel. Short stubs are also possible. The signal wires H and L must be terminated at both ends of the bus using a 120 a resistor. The screen must be continuous
over the entire length of the bus and earthed at one point. It is recommended to use a
twisted-pair cable with two twisted, screened pairs of cores. The 24 V supply voltage is
connected to the second pair of cores.
The transmission rate, depending on the network length, is between 125 kbit/s and
500 kbit/s. The possible network lengths are 100 m at 500 kbit/s up to 500 m at
125 kbit/s.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
163
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 78: DeviceNet bus cable
Node
120 F terminator
Depending on the cable used and the baud rate set, the following maximum physical
values are possible:
Tab. 136: Maximum cable
lengths FX0-GDEV
Cable length
125 kbit/s
250 kbit/s
500 kbit/s
Overall length with thick cable (O 0,34 mm²)
500 m
250 m
100 m
Overall length with thin cable
100 m
100 m
100 m
Overall length with ribbon cable
380 m
200 m
75 m
Maximum stub length
6m
6m
6m
Maximum length of all stubs
156 m
78 m
39 m
6.3.3
Setting up DeviceNet communication
To setup the DeviceNet communication between the gateway and the higher level functional logic, the following steps must be taken:
Install EDS file.
Define type of communication.
Define contents of the communication.
Select and use data mapping.
Step 1: Install the electronic data sheet (EDS file)
The device characteristics are described using the Electronic Data Sheet (EDS), which every standard bus configuration tool uses. Before the FX0-GDEV can be used as device in the
network configuration tool for the first time, the EDS file of the gateway must be installed
into the hardware catalogue of the tool.
You will find the EDS file and device icon for PLC interfacing …
in the Internet on the FX0-GDEV product page.
in the Flexi Soft Designer program folder on your hard disk (default installation folder is
“C:\programs\SICK\FlexiSoft\DeviceDescriptions\...”).
Download the EDS file and device icon from www.sick.com, on the FX0-GDEV product
page.
Follow the instructions in the online help or in the user manual of the DeviceNet configuration tool for installing EDS files.
Step 2: Define the type of communication
Choose the type of communication that is to be used between the gateway and the
higher level functional logic (Polled or Change of state/Cyclic).
164
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 79: Configuration of the
type of communication based
on the example of the
DeviceNetManager™ from
Allen Bradley
Step 3: Define the contents of the communication
Choose the input and output data sets that are to be transmitted between the gateway
and the functional logic.
Fig. 80: Selection of input
data set 1 and output data
set 1 using
DeviceNetManager™ from
Allen Bradley
Fig. 81: Selection of input
data set 3 and output data
set 1-5 using
DeviceNetManager™ from
Allen Bradley
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
165
Chapter 6
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Step 4: Configure data mapping
For information how to define and customize the content and tag names of the input and
output data sets please see chapter 7 “Layout and content of the process image” on
page 172 and the operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software
(SICK part no. 8012998).
6.3.4
Supported DeviceNet features
The FX0-GDEV supports the following functions of a DeviceNet Group 2 slave (server):
Explicit Messaging (fragmented)
Implicit Messaging (I/O messages)
– Poll I/O (fragmented)
– Change of state I/O (fragmented)
– Cyclic I/O (fragmented)
Unconnected Explicit Request Messages (pre-defined master/slave connection set)
Device heartbeat and shutdown messages
UCMM port (Unconnected Message Manager)
Duplicate MAC ID messages
Offline Connection Set
Pre-defined master/slave connection set
The FX0-GDEV supports a pre-defined master/slave connection set that makes it possible
to establish a DeviceNet connection that requires fewer network and device resources.
This set contains an explicit messaging connection and makes possible several different
I/O connections, including Poll, COS and Cyclic.
Poll I/O messages
The Poll command is sent by the master. A Poll command is directed at a single, specific
slave (point-to-point connection). A master must send a dedicated Poll command to each
slave that is to be polled. On the receipt of the Poll command the slave replies to the
master with an I/O message.
Change of state I/O and Cyclic I/O messages
A Change of state message is sent by either the master or the slave. Change of state and
Cyclic messages are directed at an individual, specific slave (point-to-point connection).
They can be answered with a confirmation.
Explicit messages
Explicit message requests are used to read or write attributes. The result of such a request
is signaled with an explicit message reply.
Unconnected Messages
Unconnected messages (UCMM messages) are used to establish or close explicit connections between two devices. They are processed by the Unconnected Message Manager
(also termed a UCMM port). It is possible to establish a maximum of three simultaneous
connections via UCMM.
Group 2 Only Unconnected Explicit Request Messages
Group 2 Only Unconnected Explicit Request messages are used to allocate or close the
pre-defined master/slave connection set. They are only available on devices that do not
support a UCMM port and are used as an alternative method to establish a connection.
However only one connection with a single partner is possible, specifically the master.
166
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fieldbus gateways
Operating Instructions
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Duplicate MAC ID messages
These messages are used to open the network access state machine that prevents two or
more nodes having an identical MAC ID in the same network.
6.3.5
DeviceNet protocol settings
Assembly object
Tab. 137: Assembly object
Parameter name
Meaning
SUPPORT_ASSEMBLY_ATTRIB_1N2
0 = Attributes 1 and 2 of the assembly object are not
supported
0 = Attributes 1 and 2 of the assembly object are supported
0 = Attribute 4 of the assembly object is not supported
0 = Attribute 4 of the assembly object is supported
Number of assembly instances
SUPPORT_ASSEMBLY_ATTRIB_4
ASMOBJ_NUM_OF_INSTANCES
6.3.6
Value
1
1
9
Assemblies
Assembly objects are used to exchange input or output data that comprise more than one
attribute via a single connection. Here a data package is prepared that can be referenced
as attribute 3 of the Assembly object class (class 4).
The information on which attributes are combined into an assembly object is called
assembly mapping.
Produced Assembly Instance (Target—Originator)
Tab. 138: Produced
Assembly Instance
Instance ID
Notes
Description
1
Input data set 1-4
2
Input data set 2-4
3
Input data set 3-4
4
Input data set 4
Size [bytes]
Received data
50
82
142
202
32
92
152
60
120
60
Input data set 1
Input data set 1-2
Input data set 1-3
Input data set 1-4
Input data set 2
Input data set 2-3
Input data set 2-4
Input data set 3
Input data set 3-4
Input data set 4
All values are data type Array of USINT. Therefore the possible values range from
0R255.
The access rule for all instances is GET.
All these assemblies can be accessed via Implicit Message or via Explicit Message.
Consumed Assembly Instance (Originator—Target)
Tab. 139: Consumed
Assembly Instance
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Instance ID
Description
5
Output data sets 1-5
6
Output data sets 2-5
7
Output data sets 3-5
8
Output data sets 4-5
9
Output data set 5
Size [bytes]
10
20
30
40
50
10
20
30
40
10
20
30
10
20
10
Sent Data
One output data set
Two output data sets
Three output data sets
Four output data sets
Five output data sets
One output data set
Two output data sets
Three output data sets
Four output data sets
One output data set
Two output data sets
Three output data sets
One output data set
Two output data sets
One output data set
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
167
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Notes
All values are data type Array of USINT. Therefore the possible values range from
0R255.
The access rule for all instances is GET/SET.
All these assemblies can be accessed via Implicit Message or via Explicit Message.
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object
(73h — one instance per data set)
The vendor specific Individual Input Data Set Transfer object defines the attributes by
which the PLC can request either full input data sets or individual parameters within an
input data set.
Class attributes
Tab. 140: Class attributes for
the Individual Input Data Set
Transfer object (73h)
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data value(s)
Access rule
1
Revision
UINT
1
Reading
2
Max. instance
UINT
4
Reading
3
Number of instances
UINT
4
Reading
Attribute ID
Name
Data type
Data value(s)
Access rule
1 to n
(dependent on
data set definition)
Request input data
set specific data
Dependent
on data set
definition
0-255
Reading
Instance attributes
Tab. 141: Instance attributes
for the Individual Input Data
Set Transfer object (73h)
General services
Tab. 142: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) general services
Service code
Implemented in Class
Implemented in Instance
Service name
01h
Yes
Yes
Get_Attributes_All
0Eh
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Instance attribute definitions
Attribute 1 to n — Request input data set specific parameters
These attributes return the input data set specific data arrays. Get Attribute Single
requests for a specific input data set only return the parameter information for the
requested data set. Get Attributes All requests return the entire data set.
The data set attributes, numbered from 1 to N, refer to each individual attribute of each
individual input data set. Each instance relates to a unique input data set and each input
data set has a unique attribute numbering scheme. The following tables reflect the attribute definitions for each input data set.
Get All Data Set Attributes request
All data set information will be returned in integer (16 bit word) format. For byte data, the
first byte will be placed in the least significant or rightmost byte of the integer and the
second byte will be placed in the most significant or leftmost byte of the integer.
Example:
For an input data set, the data will be returned as follows:
– IntegerArray[0]: BBAAh
— AA = BYTE1; BB = BYTE2
– IntegerArray[1]: DDCCh
— CC = BYTE3; DD = BYTE4
– …
– IntegerArray[6]: NNMMh
168
— MM = BYTE13; NN = BYTE14
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
Instance 1 — Input data set 1 attribute definitions
Tab. 143: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 1 attribute
definitions
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Byte 0
SINT
2
Byte 1
SINT
…
…
…
50
Byte 49
SINT
Instance 2 — Input data set 2 attribute definitions
Tab. 144: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 2 attribute
definitions
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Total checksum
UDINT
2
Flexi Soft checksum
UDINT
3
CPU0 and CPU1: Reserved
UDINT
CPU2 and CPU3: ACR checksum
4
Reserved
UDINT
5
Reserved
UDINT
6
Reserved
UDINT
7
Reserved
UDINT
8
Reserved
UDINT
Instance 3 — Input data set 3 attribute definitions
Tab. 145: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 3 attribute
definitions
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Module status module 0
UINT[2]
2
Module status module 1
UINT[2]
…
…
…
15
Module status module 14
UINT[2]
Instance 4 — Input data set 4 attribute definitions
Tab. 146: Individual Input
Data Set Transfer object
(73h) instance 4 attribute
definitions
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Attribute number
Data set parameter
Size
1
Reserved
UINT[2]
2
Reserved
UINT[2]
…
…
…
15
Reserved
UINT[2]
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
169
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
6.3.7
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
For information on how to perform diagnostics on the Flexi Soft system please refer to the
operating instructions for the Flexi Soft Designer software (SICK part no. 8012998).
Tab. 147: Troubleshooting for
the FX0-GDEV
Symbol description:
: LED is off
Green: LED lights up green
Red: LED flashes red
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
FX0-GDEV does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Off
MS
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GDEV does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Green
MS
Red (1 Hz)
FX0-GDEV does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Green
MS
Red/green
FX0-GDEV does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS
Green
MS
Red/green
Configuration required, node guard
or heartbeat message have not
been sent.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Configuration download is not
completed.
Configure the FX0-GDEV and download
the configuration to the device.
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
No data transmission since
powerRup
Start the data transmission.
No data transmission since
powerRup
False baud rate
False Node ID/DeviceNet address
The cable has been disconnected.
FX0-GDEV does not supply PDO FX0-GDEV is in Idle mode. Node
guard or heartbeat messages will
data.
be sent.
PWR Green
Flexi Soft configuration is not
NS Off/ Red/ Green
MS
Green (1 Hz)
verified and main module is
stopped.
FX0-GDEV does not supply PDO Supply voltage too low.
data.
PWR Green
NS Green
MS
Off
FX0-GDEV does not supply any Supply voltage dip.
data.
PWR Red
NS Red
MS
Red
FX0-GDEV does not supply any False Node ID/DeviceNet address.
data.
False baud rate,
PWR Green
FX0-GDEV is in Idle mode.
NS
Green (1 Hz)
MS
Green (1 Hz)
FX0-GDEV does not supply any False baud rate and FX0-GDEV
data.
transceiver is in bus off state
(hardware problem at DeviceNet
PWR Green
physical layer).
NS Red
The cable has been disconnected.
MS
Red/green
FX0-GDEV does not supply any DeviceNet master is in stop or preoperational state.
data.
During initialization of the bus
PWR Green
system, another slave could not be
NS
Green (1 Hz)
initialized.
MS Green
DeviceNet state of the FX0-GDEV is
pre-operational.
False Node ID/DeviceNet address
FX0-GDEV does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS Red
MS
Green
170
FX0-GDEV transceiver is in error
passive.
The cable has been disconnected.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
Wait until the configuration download
has been completed.
Start the data transmission.
Check and correct the baud rate.
Check and correct the Node ID and
DeviceNet address.
Check cabling.
CPU/application is stopped. Start CPU
(change into Run state).
Verify the configuration with Flexi Soft
Designer and start the main module.
Check supply voltage.
Check supply voltage.
Reset Flexi Soft system.
Check and correct the Node ID and
DeviceNet address.
Check and correct the baud rate.
Check and correct the baud rate.
Check cabling.
Reset Flexi Soft system.
Set DeviceNet master into Run state
(DeviceNet state Operational).
Check whether all slaves on the bus are
“On”.
Check cabling.
Check whether DeviceNet master starts
automatically.
Check and correct the DeviceNet
address.
Check cabling.
Check the diagnostics messages with
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Reset Flexi Soft system.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Fieldbus gateways
Chapter 6
Flexi Soft Gateways
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Error
Possible cause
Possible remedy
FX0-GDEV does not supply any
data.
PWR Green
NS
Red (1 Hz)
MS
Red/green
Node guarding or heartbeat
consumer failure
Guarding configuration has been
changed.
FX0-GDEV is in Critical fault
mode.
PWR Green
NS Red
MS
Red (2 Hz)
FX0-GDEV internal device error
CPU firmware version does not
support Flexi Soft gateways.
FX0-GDEV/Flexi Soft system is
in Critical fault mode.
PWR Red
NS Off
MS Red
FX0-GDEV is not plugged properly
into the other Flexi Soft modules.
Module connecting plug is soiled or
damaged.
Other Flexi Soft module has
internal critical error.
Check cabling.
Check life guarding time (life time
factor O 1).
Check heartbeat consumer time
(should be O 1.5 × heartbeat producer
time).
Check the diagnostics messages with
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Reset Flexi Soft system.
Switch off the power supply of the Flexi
Soft system and switch it on again.
Check the diagnostics messages with
the Flexi Soft Designer.
Use a FX3-CPUx with the required
firmware version (see section 2.2
“Correct use” on page 10).
If the error remains, replace the
gateway.
Plug the FX0-GDEV in correctly.
Clean the connecting socket/plug.
Repower the system.
Check the other Flexi Soft modules.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
171
Layout and content of the
process image
Chapter 7
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
7
Layout and content of the process image
7.1
Routing
The process image transmitted by the Flexi Soft gateways into the network consists of the
operational data (e.g. logic results, input and output states) and the diagnostics data (e.g.
module status, checksums). These data are organised in 4 data sets.
Tab. 148: Content of the data
sets 1-4
Data set
Content
Size
Can be customized
16)
1
Operational data
Max 50 bytes
Yes
2
Checksums
32 bytes
No
3
Status and diagnostics
60 bytes
No
4
Reserved
60 bytes
No
The operational data in data set 1 are organized into one or several data blocks, dependent of the network protocol. For detailed information about the modularisation of the data
sent into the network please see Tab. 149 and read the chapter on the related gateway.
The content of data set 1 can be freely customized with a granularity of 1 byte but is preconfigured in the delivery status (see section 7.2 “Default settings for the operational
data” on page 173 and section 7.3 “Customizing the operational data (Flexi Soft to
Network)” on page 174).
The diagnostics data in data sets 2-4 depend on the network protocol used and are
described in the chapter on the related gateway.
16)
172
FX0-GCAN: 32 Bytes.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Layout and content of the
process image
Chapter 7
Flexi Soft Gateways
7.2
Default settings for the operational data
In the delivery status, the operational data are pre-configured. Depending on the gateway
used, these data are subdivided in several data blocks.
The following table gives an overview which bytes are assigned to the default configuration
and how the data are modularised for the different gateways.
Tab. 149: Default configuration for the operational data
transmitted into the network
EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP,
Ethernet TCP/IP
PROFINET IO, PROFIBUS DP
Byte
Default assignment
Default assignment
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
32-35
36-47
Logic result 0
Logic result 1
Logic result 2
Logic result 3
Module 1 input
Module 2 input
Module 3 input
Module 4 input
Module 5 input
Module 6 input
Module 7 input
Module 8 input
Module 9 input
Module 10 input
Module 11 input
Module 12 input
Module 1 output
Module 2 output
Module 3 output
Module 4 output
Module 5 output
Module 6 output
Module 7 output
Module 8 output
Module 9 output
Module 10 output
Module 11 output
Module 12 output
Gateway direct output
values 0
Gateway direct output
values 1
Gateway direct output
values 2
Gateway direct output
values 3
Not assigned
Not assigned
48-49
Not assigned
29
30
31
Input data set
#1
(50 bytes)
Input data block
Module 1 input
Module 2 input
Module 3 input
Module 4 input
Module 5 input
Module 6 input
Module 7 input
Module 8 input
Module 9 input
Module 10 input
Module 11 input
Module 12 input
Module 1 output
Module 2 output
Module 3 output
Module 4 output
Module 5 output
Module 6 output
Module 7 output
Module 8 output
Module 9 output
Module 10 output
Module 11 output
Module 12 output
Logic result 0
Logic result 1
Logic result 2
Logic result 3
Gateway direct output
values 0
Gateway direct output
values 1
Gateway direct output
values 2
Gateway direct output
values 3
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
#1
(12 bytes)
#2
(12 bytes)
#3
(12 bytes)
#4
(12 bytes)
#5
(2 bytes)
For the FX0-GETC please see Tab. 75 on page 107.
For the FX0-GCAN please see Tab. 110 on page 143.
The default byte assignment can be freely customized as described in the following
section.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
173
Layout and content of the
process image
Chapter 7
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
7.3
Customizing the operational data (Flexi Soft to
Network)
This section outlines briefly how you can customize the operational data that the Flexi Soft
gateway transmits to the network. You will find more detailed information in the Flexi Soft
Designer software operating instructions (SICK part no. 8012998).
In the delivery status, the data routing configuration of the Flexi Soft gateways is shown in
the gateway configuration dialog.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the respective gateway or double click the desired gateway in the hardware configuration view to open the
gateway configuration dialog.
Click on the CPU to network tab on the left hand menu to display the routing configuration dialog.
The default setting is as follows (example for Modbus TCP):
Fig. 82: Default configuration
for the operational data
transmitted into the network
4
1
2
3
Basically this dialog is divided into three areas: Available data [1], Gateway data set to
network [2] and Tag names [3]. The upper left corner of the dialog holds the toolbar [4].
174
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Layout and content of the
process image
Operating Instructions
Chapter 7
Flexi Soft Gateways
7.3.1
The toolbar
Fig. 83: Toolbar for the
routing configuration
The toolbar contains buttons for the following actions (from left to right):
The Load user configuration and Save user configuration buttons allow you to load
and/or save a configuration including the used tag names in XML format. If you load a
configuration, all previously made changes that have not been saved will be lost. You
can not undo this action.
With the Import and Export buttons you can import and export the used tag names as a
CSV file or in a network specific file format, e.g. SIEMENS .seq for PROFIBUS or
PROFINET. This allows you to import and use the assigned tag names in a PLC program.
The Import button is only available for the Network to gateway routing configuration.
Note
Reset to default restores the default routing configuration. You will be prompted for
confirmation. If you click Yes, all previously made changes that have not been saved will
be lost. You can not undo this action.
Clear all clears the configuration, i.e. deletes all assigned bytes in the Gateway data
set to network area. You will be prompted for confirmation.
Delete routing deletes the selected byte from the Gateway data set to network area.
The Undo and Redo buttons allow you to undo or redo changes you made to your
configuration.
7.3.2
Available data area
This area offers all sources from which data may be routed into the network. It is divided in
two views holding the available Input types and Output data. You can switch between
these views using the file cards at the bottom.
The Input types view contains the input values for the connected Flexi Soft modules
and EFI devices. If your Flexi Soft system contains a second gateway, the input data of
this gateway (i.e. data received from the network the second gateway is connected to)
will be available here as well.
The Output view offers the output values for the connected Flexi Soft modules and EFI
devices as well as the Logic results from the logic editor.
All sources supported by the current configuration are displayed in black:
connected Flexi Soft modules
connected EFI devices
configured logic results
17)
gateway input data available from another gateway in the system
Sources currently not configured will be displayed in grey. Activating the Show only
available data checkbox in the upper left corner hides the unused sources from the view.
Sources that offer “live” data are marked with a little icon next to the text.
17)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
In the default configuration, only the first logic result byte (Logic result 0) is active and available. You can
activate more logic result output bits in the logic editor (see the Flexi Soft software operating instructions,
SICK part no. 8012998).
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
175
Layout and content of the
process image
Chapter 7
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
How to add a data byte to the routing table:
Drag and drop an element (i.e. byte) from the Available data area to a free slot in the
Gateway data set to network area. If the desired position is not free, you will have to
clear it first by deleting or moving the byte currently assigned to it.
Note
It is possible to use the same byte several times in the routing table.
7.3.3
Gateway data set to network area
This area contains the routing table. It shows the current content of the Flexi Soft gateway’s input data modules, bytes and bits highlighted blue will hold “live” data from the
system since the hardware configuration does support the source. Bytes highlighted grey
actually do not have data associated with them since the hardware configuration does not
support the sources.
How to delete a data byte from the routing table:
Drag and drop the byte you want to delete to the trashcan icon in the bottom left corner
of the Gateway data set to network area.
Or:
Select the byte you want to delete by clicking it with the left mouse button. Then, click
on the Delete routing button in the toolbar.
Or:
Call up the context menu by clicking the respective byte with the right mouse button. In
the context menu, select the Delete routing command.
How to move a data byte to another place in the routing table:
Drag and drop the byte you want to move to the desired position. If the desired position
is not free, you will have to clear it first by deleting or moving the byte currently assigned
to it.
7.3.4
Tag names area
This area shows the tag names associated with each bit of the byte currently selected in
the Available data or the Gateway data set to network area. You can enter these tag
names in the logic editor and in the hardware configuration dialog (e.g. for extension
modules).
In the Tag names area of the Flexi Soft to Network configuration dialog, it is not possible to
edit tag names, with the exception of the gateway direct outputs (see the following
section).
176
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Layout and content of the
process image
Operating Instructions
Chapter 7
Flexi Soft Gateways
7.3.5
Gateway direct output values
It is possible to write values directly from the logic editor into a gateway. In the default
process image, four bytes are reserved for these gateway direct output values which can
be found in the logic editor in the Outputs file card.
Note
In order to use gateway direct output values, a CPU with firmware V2.00.0 or higher is
required.
Fig. 84: Gateway direct output values in the default
process image
If required, you can configure any byte as gateway direct output value. In order to do this,
you need to assign tag names for the bits you want to use.
How to define additional gateway direct output values:
Click on a free byte in the Gateway data set to network area to select it.
Activate the Use direct editing checkbox in the upper left corner of the Tag names
area. You will now be able to edit the tag names for this byte.
If desired, enter a tag name for the selected byte.
Enter tag names for the individual bits of the selected byte that you want to use as
gateway direct output values.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
177
Layout and content of the
process image
Chapter 7
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 85: Defining additional
gateway direct output values
in the process image
All bits of the selected byte with a tag name will now appear in the logic editor in the
Outputs file card.
Note
178
You can edit the predefined gateway direct output values in the same way.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Layout and content of the
process image
Chapter 7
Flexi Soft Gateways
7.3.6
Output data configuration (Network to Flexi Soft)
In order to enable incoming data bits:
Click on Network to CPU on the left hand menu. The following dialog appears:
Fig. 86: Network to Flexi Soft
dialog of the FX0-GMOD
1
2
Basically this dialog is divided into two areas: Gateway data set from network [1] and
Tag names [2]:
The Gateway data set from network area shows the current configuration of the output
modules.
The Tag names area shows the tag names associated to the byte selected in the
Gateway data set from network area.
Select a byte in the Gateway data set from network area.
For each bit of the selected byte that you wish to use, enter a tag name in the Tag
names area.
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
179
Layout and content of the
process image
Chapter 7
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Each bit you enter a tag name for here will be available within the logic editor or for the
process image of a second gateway:
Fig. 87: Tag names of incoming bits in the logic editor dialog of the FX3-CPUx
7.3.7
Saving and loading a configuration
Using the buttons Load user configuration and Save user configuration you can save and
load your configuration in XML format. If you load a configuration, all previously made
changes that have not been saved will be lost. You can not undo this action.
7.3.8
Importing and exporting a configuration
With the Import and Export buttons you can import and export a configuration including
the tag names used as a CSV file or in a network specific file format, e.g. SIEMENS .seq for
PROFIBUS or PROFINET. This allows you to import and use tag names you have assigned in
the Flexi Soft project in the PLC program and vice versa.
If you import a configuration, all previously made changes that have not been saved will be
lost. You can not undo this action.
Note
180
The Import button is only available for the Network to gateway routing configuration.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Layout and content of the
process image
Operating Instructions
Chapter 7
Flexi Soft Gateways
7.4
Monitoring the operational data online
When the Flexi Soft system is online and running, you can monitor the operational data
online in the gateway configuration window.
Click on the Interfaces button above the main window and select the respective gateway or double click the desired gateway in the hardware configuration view to open the
gateway configuration dialog.
Click on the Flexi Soft to Network or the Network to Flexi Soft tab on the left hand
menu to display the routing view for the input or output data you want to monitor.
For both directions, Flexi Soft to Network as well as Network to Flexi Soft, inactive bits
are displayed grey while active bits are highlighted green:
Fig. 88: Active and inactive
bits in the online process
image
In the Flexi Soft to Network view, bits that are inactive due to an error are displayed red.
This could be the case e.g. for the outputs of an FX3RXTIO module if the power supply of
this module is faulty:
Fig. 89: Inactive Network
input bits as a result of an
error.
In the Network to Flexi Soft view, bits that have no tag name assigned (so that they can
not be used in the logic editor) but which are included in the process image that the Flexi
Soft gateway receives from the PLC, are highlighted yellow:
Fig. 90: Network output bits
with no tag names assigned
in the online process image
Note
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
The Flexi Soft gateways always reflect the actual physical status of the inputs and outputs
on the connected modules and devices. This means that even when Force mode is active
and inputs that are physically Low are forced High (or vice versa) the actual physical
status of these inputs will be transmitted to the PLC instead of the (virtual) forced status.
If, however, as a result of forcing of one or several inputs, one or several outputs change
their status, the changed status of these outputs will be transmitted to the PLC since the
actual physical status of the outputs on the devices has changed.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
181
Technical specifications
Chapter 8
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
8
Technical specifications
Tab. 150: Technical specifications FX0-GENT, FX0GMOD and FX0-GPNT
8.1
Technical specifications gateways
8.1.1
EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFINET IO
Interface
Fieldbus
EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFINET IO
Integrated switch
3-port layer-2 managed switch with AutoMDI-X for automatic detection of crossed
Ethernet cable
Connection technique
RJ-45 socket
Transfer rate
10 Mbit/s (10 Base-T) or 100 Mbit/s (100
Base-TX), autosensing
Update rate (heartbeat rate)
Configurable from 40 … 65,535 ms
Change of state (COS) update rate
10 ms
Addressing factory setting
IP: 192.168.250.250
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Default gateway: 0.0.0.0
MAC address
Printed on type label, example:
00:06:77:02:00:A7
8.1.2
Tab. 151: Technical
specifications FX0-GETC
182
EtherCAT
Interface
Fieldbus
EtherCAT
Connection technique
RJ-45 socket
EtherCAT application cycle time
4 ms
Watchdog Time Process Data
O 5 ms
Watchdog Time Process Data Interface
(PDI)
O 55 ms
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Technical specifications
Chapter 8
Flexi Soft Gateways
8.1.3
Tab. 152: Technical
specifications FX0-GPRO
PROFIBUS DP
Interface
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Fieldbus
PROFIBUS DP-V0
Interface level
RS-485
Connector technology
D-Sub socket 9-pin
Slave address (set via
rotary switches)
0
99
Slave address (set via
18)
Flexi Soft Designer)
3
125
Baud rate
(automatic adjustment)
12 MBaud
Baud rate (kbit/s
with standard cable)
Max. cable length
9.6/19.2/93.75
1200 m
187.5
1000 m
500
400 m
1 500
200 m
12 000
100 m
Cable parameters see section 6.1 “PROFIBUS DP gateway” from page 116.
8.1.4
Tab. 153: Technical
specifications FX0-GCAN
CANopen
Interface
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Fieldbus
CANopen DS-301
Interface level
RS-485
Connector technology
5 pin open style connector
Slave address (set via
rotary switches)
0
99
Slave address (set via
19)
Flexi Soft Designer)
1
127
Baud rate (kbit/s
with standard cable)
Max. cable length
125
500 m
250
250 m
500
100 m
800
40 m
1 000
20 m
Cable parameters see chapter 6.2 “CANopen gateway” from page 130.
18)
19)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
In order to set the slave address via software, the hardware setting for the address must be “00”.
In order to set the slave address via software, the hardware setting for the address must be “00”.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
183
Technical specifications
Chapter 8
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
8.1.5
Tab. 154: Technical
specifications FX0-GDEV
DeviceNet
Interface
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Fieldbus
DeviceNet
Interface level
RS-485
Connector technology
5-pin open style connector
Slave address (via
rotary switch)
0
63
Slave address (via Flexi 1
20)
Soft Designer)
63
Baud rate (kbits/s
with standard cable)
Max. cable length
125
500 m
250
250 m
500
100 m
Cable parameters see section 6.3 “DeviceNet gateway” on page 160.
8.2
Technical specifications, supply circuit
These technical specifications apply to all gateways.
Tab. 155: Technical
specifications supply circuit
Supply circuit
(e.g. via FLEXBUS+)
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
16.8 V DC
24 V DC
30 V DC
FX0-GPRO, FX0-GCAN,
FX0-GDEV
–
–
1.6 W
FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD,
FX0-GPNT
–
–
2.4 W
FX0-GETC
–
–
3W
Supply voltage
Power consumption
20)
184
In order to set the slave address via software, the hardware setting for the address must be “00”.
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Technical specifications
Chapter 8
Flexi Soft Gateways
8.3
General technical specifications
These technical specifications apply to all gateways.
Tab. 156: General technical
specifications
Terminals
Fieldbus
See section 8.1 “Technical specifications
gateways”
FLEXBUS+
10-pin connector for internal safety bus
(plug)
Climatic conditions
Ambient operating temperature TA
–25 to +55 °C
Storage temperature
–25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity
10 % to 95 %, non-condensing
Climatic conditions
Air pressure in operation
860 to 1060 hPa (EN 61 131R2)
Mechanical strength
Vibration resistance
10-500 Hz/5g (EN 60 068R2R6)
Shock resistance
Continuous shock
10 g, 16 ms (EN 60 068R2R29)
Single shock
30 g, 11 ms (EN 60 068R2R27)
Electrical safety (see FX3-CPUx)
Enclosure rating
IP 20 (EN 60 529)
Protection class
III (EN 61 140)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Class A (EN 61 000R6R2/EN 55 011)
Mechanical and assembly
Housing
Material
Polycarbonate
Type
Device for control cabinet installation
Enclosure rating
IP 20 (EN 60 529)
Colour
Gateways
Light grey
Weight
FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD, FX0-GPNT
125 g (± 10 %)
FX0-GPRO, FX0-GETC, FX0-GCAN,
FX0RGDEV
150 g (± 10 %)
FLEXBUS+ connection (internal bus)
Number of poles
10
Connectors
1 plug left, 1 socket right
Mounting rail
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
DIN mounting rail acc. to EN 60 715
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
185
Technical specifications
Chapter 8
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
8.4
Dimensional drawings
8.4.1
Dimensional drawing FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD, FX0-GPNT and FX0-GETC
Fig. 91: Dimensional drawing
FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD,
FX0>GPNT and FX0-GETC
(mm)
78
58
109
96.5
93.7
114.3
120.6
11.8
4.3
93.3
96.5
186
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
29.1
22.5
15.8
86.5
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Technical specifications
Chapter 8
Flexi Soft Gateways
8.4.2
Dimensional drawing FX0-GPRO, FX0-GCAN and FX0-GDEV
Fig. 92: Dimensional drawing
FX0-GPRO, FX0-GCAN and
FX0-GDEV (mm)
78
126
120.6
109
93.7
114.3
131
58
93.3
22.5
29.1
29.1
22.5
96.5
FX0-GCAN and
FX0-GDEV only
FX0-GPRO only
FX0-GCAN and FX0-GDEV only
8.5
Tab. 157: Ordering information Flexi Soft gateways
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Ordering information Flexi Soft gateways
Type
Gateway
Part number
FX0-GENT
EtherNet/IP
1044072
FX0-GMOD
Modbus TCP
1044073
FX0-GPNT
PROFINET IO
1044074
FX0-GPRO
PROFIBUS DP
1044075
FX0-GCAN
CANopen
1044076
FX0-GDEV
DeviceNet
1044077
FX0-GETC
EtherCAT
1051432
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
187
Annex
Chapter 9
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
9
Annex
9.1
EC declaration of conformity
Fig. 93: EC declaration of
conformity (page 1)
188
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Annex
Chapter 9
Flexi Soft Gateways
Fig. 94: EC declaration of
conformity (page 2)
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
189
Chapter 9
Annex
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
190
9.2
List of tables
Tab. 1:
Overview on disposal by components................................................................... 11
Tab. 2:
Device variants and features overview................................................................. 13
Tab. 3:
Firmware versions of the Ethernet gateways ....................................................... 13
Tab. 4:
Availability of data set 1-4 ..................................................................................... 15
Tab. 5:
Overview input data sets 1-3 (default settings for EtherNet/IP,
Modbus TCP and TCP/IP) ...................................................................................... 16
Tab. 6:
Module status ........................................................................................................ 17
Tab. 7:
Usage of the more significant bits on dual-channel evaluation on
I/O modules FX3-XTIO............................................................................................ 18
Tab. 8:
Module status bits of the FX3-CPUx main modules............................................. 20
Tab. 9:
Module status bits of the I/O modules FX3-XTIO and FX3-XTDI.......................... 20
Tab. 10:
Module status bits of the I/O modules FX3-XTDS................................................ 21
Tab. 11:
Module status bits of the I/O modules FX0-STIO................................................. 21
Tab. 12:
Module status bits of the Drive Monitor FX3-MOCx modules.............................. 21
Tab. 13:
Module status bits of the gateways ...................................................................... 22
Tab. 14:
Example module status in data set 3 ................................................................... 22
Tab. 15:
Example module status byte 0 of module 2......................................................... 22
Tab. 16:
Example module status byte 3 of module 2......................................................... 22
Tab. 17:
Output data blocks 1-5 for the different gateways .............................................. 23
Tab. 18:
Number of possible TCP/IP connections .............................................................. 37
Tab. 19:
Telegram structure................................................................................................. 40
Tab. 20:
Error response message........................................................................................ 40
Tab. 21:
Get data set(s) request.......................................................................................... 42
Tab. 22:
Get data set(s) response ....................................................................................... 42
Tab. 23:
Write output data set setting command............................................................... 43
Tab. 24:
Write output data set setting response ................................................................ 43
Tab. 25:
Auto update mode configuration command......................................................... 44
Tab. 26:
Auto update mode configuration response .......................................................... 44
Tab. 27:
Auto update mode normal operation message.................................................... 46
Tab. 28:
TCP/IP process image example ............................................................................ 46
Tab. 29:
Meaning of the LED displays of the FX0-GENT..................................................... 53
Tab. 30:
Examples for the packet update interval.............................................................. 56
Tab. 31:
Recommended bandwidths for Class 1 messages.............................................. 56
Tab. 32:
Class 1 read access points to input data sets ..................................................... 57
Tab. 33:
Class 1 write access points to output data sets .................................................. 58
Tab. 34:
Assembly object class attributes .......................................................................... 58
Tab. 35:
Assembly object instance definitions ................................................................... 59
Tab. 36:
Assembly object instance attributes..................................................................... 60
Tab. 37:
Assembly object common services ....................................................................... 60
Tab. 38:
Number of possible connections .......................................................................... 61
Tab. 39:
Configuration guideline — Gateway as master ..................................................... 61
Tab. 40:
Configuration guideline — Gateway as slave ........................................................ 61
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Annex
Chapter 9
Flexi Soft Gateways
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Tab. 41:
Full Data Set Transfer object (72h) class attribute (instance 0) .........................65
Tab. 42:
Full Data Set Transfer object (72h) instance attribute (instance 1)....................65
Tab. 43:
Full Data Set Transfer object (72h) common services.........................................66
Tab. 44:
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) class attributes ........................66
Tab. 45:
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance attributes...................66
Tab. 46:
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) common services .....................66
Tab. 47:
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 1 attribute
definitions ...............................................................................................................67
Tab. 48:
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 2 attribute
definitions ...............................................................................................................67
Tab. 49:
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 3 attribute
definitions ...............................................................................................................67
Tab. 50:
Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 4 attribute
definitions ...............................................................................................................67
Tab. 51:
Supported PCCC messages for the PLC-5, SLC and MicroLogix PLCs.................69
Tab. 52:
Addressing for the PLC-5/SLC messages .............................................................70
Tab. 53:
PCCC object (67h) common services ....................................................................70
Tab. 54:
PCCC object (67h) request message ....................................................................71
Tab. 55:
PCCC object (67h) response message..................................................................71
Tab. 56:
PCCC object (67h) supported PCCC command types...........................................71
Tab. 57:
Troubleshooting for the FX0-GENT ........................................................................74
Tab. 58:
Meaning of the LED displays .................................................................................75
Tab. 59:
Number of possible connections...........................................................................77
Tab. 60:
Configuration guideline — Gateway as master .....................................................78
Tab. 61:
Configuration guideline — Gateway as slave.........................................................78
Tab. 62:
Data addressing for FX0-GMOD as receiver .........................................................82
Tab. 63:
Modbus commands................................................................................................83
Tab. 64:
Modbus error messages ........................................................................................83
Tab. 65:
Troubleshooting for the FX0-GMOD.......................................................................83
Tab. 66:
Meaning of the LED displays of the FX0-GPNT .....................................................85
Tab. 67:
Default content of input data block 1-5 of the FX0RGPNT....................................92
Tab. 68:
Memory location for data set 2, 3 and 4 ..............................................................93
Tab. 69:
Default content of input data set 2-4 of the FX0RGPNT. ......................................94
Tab. 70:
I&M information of the FX0-GPNT .........................................................................95
Tab. 71:
PROFINET IO error type definitions........................................................................96
Tab. 72:
Troubleshooting for the FX0-GPNT ..................................................................... 100
Tab. 73:
Meaning of the status LEDs of the FX0-GETC.................................................... 102
Tab. 74:
Process data objects of the FX0-GETC ............................................................... 106
Tab. 75:
Default content of input data set 1-5 of the FX0RGETC..................................... 107
Tab. 76:
FX0-GETC Input Process Data CoE object 2000h ............................................. 112
Tab. 77:
FX0-GETC Output Process Data CoE object 2001h........................................... 112
Tab. 78:
FX0-GETC checksums in CoE object 2002h ...................................................... 112
Tab. 79:
FX0-GETC Status and Diagnosis CoE object 2003h.......................................... 112
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
191
Chapter 9
Annex
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 80:
Structure of the Diagnosis history object ...........................................................113
Tab. 81:
Module status bits of the FX0-GETC ...................................................................114
Tab. 82:
Troubleshooting for the FX0-GETC ......................................................................115
Tab. 83:
Meaning of the status LEDs of the FX0-GPRO ...................................................116
Tab. 84:
Address switch FX0RGPRO ...................................................................................117
Tab. 85:
Explanation bus cable FX0-GPRO .......................................................................118
Tab. 86:
Cable parameters FX0RGPRO ..............................................................................118
Tab. 87:
Maximum cable lengths FX0-GPRO ....................................................................119
Tab. 88:
GSD file versions for the FX0-GPRO....................................................................119
Tab. 89:
Default content of input data block 1-5 of the FX0RGPRO.................................121
Tab. 90:
Content of the PROFIBUS diagnostics messages ..............................................124
Tab. 91:
Flexi Soft module numbers..................................................................................124
Tab. 92:
PROFIBUS error messages ..................................................................................125
Tab. 93:
Troubleshooting for the FX0-GPRO .....................................................................129
Tab. 94:
Meaning of the status LEDs of the FX0-GCAN ...................................................130
Tab. 95:
Address switch FX0RGCAN ...................................................................................131
Tab. 96:
DIP switch settings on the FX0-GCAN .................................................................131
Tab. 97:
Maximum cable lengths FX0-GCAN ....................................................................133
Tab. 98:
CAN identifier structure .......................................................................................136
Tab. 99:
PCS communication objects................................................................................136
Tab. 100: Network management for one NMT slave with address N ................................137
Tab. 101: Network management for all NMT slaves ..........................................................137
Tab. 102: Example NMT object for resetting all communication .......................................137
Tab. 103: Polling inputs using SYNC....................................................................................138
Tab. 104: Emergency messages ..........................................................................................138
Tab. 105: CANopen emergency messages..........................................................................139
Tab. 106: CANopen emergency, diagnostic bits M2 to M5................................................141
Tab. 107: Request from NMT master ..................................................................................142
Tab. 108: Response from slave ...........................................................................................142
Tab. 109: Remote transmission request .............................................................................142
Tab. 110: Default content of the transmit process data objects (TxPDOs) of the
FX0RGCAN .............................................................................................................143
Tab. 111: TxPDO 1…4...........................................................................................................144
Tab. 112: RxPDO 1…4 ..........................................................................................................144
Tab. 113: Write SDO .............................................................................................................145
Tab. 114: Write SDO confirmation .......................................................................................145
Tab. 115: Read SDO .............................................................................................................145
Tab. 116: Read SDO confirmation .......................................................................................145
Tab. 117: Example — Read SDO ..........................................................................................146
Tab. 118: Example — Read SDO confirmation ....................................................................146
Tab. 119: Supported SDOs...................................................................................................146
Tab. 120: SDO 1018 contents .............................................................................................148
Tab. 121: SDO 1027 contents .............................................................................................148
192
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Annex
Chapter 9
Flexi Soft Gateways
Tab. 122: SDO 1400…1403 contents ................................................................................ 149
Tab. 123: SDO 1800…1803 contents ................................................................................ 149
Tab. 124: TxPDO transmission types .................................................................................. 149
Tab. 125: SDO 3100 contents............................................................................................. 150
Tab. 126: Module type codes in SDO 3300........................................................................ 151
Tab. 127: Mapping table for SDO 6000 — RxPDO 1-4 ....................................................... 152
Tab. 128: Mapping table for SDO 6200 — TxPDO 1-4 ....................................................... 153
Tab. 129: Guarding protocol overview and comparison .................................................... 154
Tab. 130: Emergency states and transitions ...................................................................... 155
Tab. 131: Error objects overview ......................................................................................... 156
Tab. 132: Troubleshooting for the FX0-GCAN..................................................................... 159
Tab. 133: Meaning of the status LEDs of the FX0-GDEV ................................................... 161
Tab. 134: Address switches on the FX0-GDEV ................................................................... 162
Tab. 135: DIP switch settings on the FX0-GDEV................................................................. 162
Tab. 136: Maximum cable lengths FX0-GDEV .................................................................... 164
Tab. 137: Assembly object................................................................................................... 167
Tab. 138: Produced Assembly Instance.............................................................................. 167
Tab. 139: Consumed Assembly Instance............................................................................ 167
Tab. 140: Class attributes for the Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) ......... 168
Tab. 141: Instance attributes for the Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h).... 168
Tab. 142: Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) general services .................... 168
Tab. 143: Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 1 attribute
definitions ............................................................................................................ 169
Tab. 144: Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 2 attribute
definitions ............................................................................................................ 169
Tab. 145: Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 3 attribute
definitions ............................................................................................................ 169
Tab. 146: Individual Input Data Set Transfer object (73h) instance 4 attribute
definitions ............................................................................................................ 169
Tab. 147: Troubleshooting for the FX0-GDEV ..................................................................... 170
Tab. 148: Content of the data sets 1-4............................................................................... 172
Tab. 149: Default configuration for the operational data transmitted into the
network ................................................................................................................ 173
Tab. 150: Technical specifications FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD and FX0-GPNT....................... 182
Tab. 151: Technical specifications FX0-GETC..................................................................... 182
Tab. 152: Technical specifications FX0-GPRO.................................................................... 183
Tab. 153: Technical specifications FX0-GCAN.................................................................... 183
Tab. 154: Technical specifications FX0-GDEV .................................................................... 184
Tab. 155: Technical specifications supply circuit ............................................................... 184
Tab. 156: General technical specifications ........................................................................ 185
Tab. 157: Ordering information Flexi Soft gateways .......................................................... 187
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
193
Chapter 9
Annex
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
194
9.3
List of illustrations
Fig. 1:
Mounting the module onto the DIN mounting rail ............................................... 25
Fig. 2:
Installing the end clips........................................................................................... 25
Fig. 3:
Removing the removable terminals ...................................................................... 26
Fig. 4:
Disconnecting the plug connections..................................................................... 26
Fig. 5:
Removing modules from the DIN mounting rail ................................................... 26
Fig. 6:
Connection settings dialog .................................................................................... 28
Fig. 7:
Modify profile dialog............................................................................................... 28
Fig. 8:
Hardware configuration dialog .............................................................................. 29
Fig. 9:
Ethernet gateway configuration dialog ................................................................. 33
Fig. 10:
Connection settings dialog .................................................................................... 34
Fig. 11:
Create new TCP/IP profile dialog .......................................................................... 34
Fig. 12:
Create new TCP/IP profile dialog after scan has been performed...................... 35
Fig. 13:
Connection settings dialog with new TCP/IP profile ............................................ 36
Fig. 14:
Connection settings dialog with new TCP/IP profile activated ............................ 36
Fig. 15:
Found gateways in the Network scan dialog........................................................ 37
Fig. 16:
TCP/IP configuration dialog................................................................................... 38
Fig. 17:
TCP/IP configuration for Application requests (Polling) mode ............................ 41
Fig. 18:
TCP/IP configuration for auto update ................................................................... 45
Fig. 19:
Socket monitor window ......................................................................................... 48
Fig. 20:
PC is TCP Client area — Gateway is configured to listen...................................... 49
Fig. 21:
PC is TCP Server area — Gateway is configured to connect ................................ 49
Fig. 22:
Write data to device — Read input data sets ....................................................... 50
Fig. 23:
Write data to device — Write output data sets ..................................................... 50
Fig. 24:
Write data to device — Configure input data sets ................................................ 51
Fig. 25:
Read automatic data from device......................................................................... 52
Fig. 26:
Interfaces and display elements of the FX0RGENT............................................... 53
Fig. 27:
EtherNet/IP gateway configuration dialog............................................................ 54
Fig. 28:
EtherNet/IP gateway configuration as master ..................................................... 62
Fig. 29:
Example of tag names in a PLC program ............................................................. 63
Fig. 30:
EtherNet/IP gateway configuration as slave ........................................................ 64
Fig. 31:
Creating tags for explicit messaging ..................................................................... 72
Fig. 32:
Main routine programming for explicit messaging............................................... 72
Fig. 33:
Explicit messaging — Message configuration....................................................... 73
Fig. 34:
Explicit messaging — Communication configuration............................................ 73
Fig. 35:
Interfaces and display elements of the FX0RGMOD ............................................. 75
Fig. 36:
Modbus TCP gateway configuration dialog........................................................... 76
Fig. 37:
Modbus TCP gateway configuration as master .................................................... 79
Fig. 38:
Modbus TCP gateway configuration as slave ....................................................... 81
Fig. 39:
Interfaces and display elements of the FX0RGPNT............................................... 85
Fig. 40:
Disabling the STATUS LED of the FX0-GPNT ........................................................ 86
Fig. 41:
PROFINET IO gateway configuration dialog .......................................................... 87
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Annex
Chapter 9
Flexi Soft Gateways
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Fig. 42:
PROFINET IO gateway in the PROFINET IO HW Config..........................................89
Fig. 43:
Configuration of the update time of the FX0-GPNT ..............................................90
Fig. 44:
Properties dialog of the FX0-GPNT ........................................................................91
Fig. 45:
Assign device name dialog for the FX0-GPNT.......................................................91
Fig. 46:
Projecting the FX0RGPNT ........................................................................................93
Fig. 47:
Controls and status indicators FX0-GETC .......................................................... 101
Fig. 48:
Gateway configuration dialog for the FX0-GETC ................................................ 104
Fig. 49:
Example for inserting the FX0-GETC into an EtherCAT network ....................... 105
Fig. 50:
PDO configuration in the EtherCAT network configuration tool ........................ 106
Fig. 51:
EtherCAT gateway configuration dialog.............................................................. 109
Fig. 52:
Edit the data block start address ....................................................................... 109
Fig. 53:
EoE activation for the FX0-GETC in TwinCAT...................................................... 110
Fig. 54:
Enabling TCP/IP routing for the FX0-GETC in the Flexi Soft Designer .............. 111
Fig. 55:
CoE object catalogue of the FX0-GETC in TwinCAT............................................ 111
Fig. 56:
Controls and status indicators FX0-GPRO.......................................................... 116
Fig. 57:
Setting the PROFIBUS address for the FX0RGPRO............................................. 117
Fig. 58:
D-Sub socket and plug pin assignments FX0RGPRO.......................................... 118
Fig. 59:
Bus cable FX0-GPRO ........................................................................................... 118
Fig. 60:
PROFIBUS DP configuration example in Siemens SIMATIC Manager .............. 120
Fig. 61:
PROFIBUS DP gateway configuration dialog ...................................................... 122
Fig. 62:
Edit the data block start address ....................................................................... 122
Fig. 63:
PROFIBUS DP gateway in the PROFIBUS HW Config ......................................... 123
Fig. 64:
Controls and status indicators FX0-GCAN.......................................................... 130
Fig. 65:
DIP switch settings on the FX0-GCAN ................................................................ 131
Fig. 66:
Setting the CANopen address for the FX0-GCAN............................................... 132
Fig. 67:
Open style connector and assignment FX0-GCAN............................................. 132
Fig. 68:
CANopen bus cable ............................................................................................. 133
Fig. 69:
CoDeSys PLC Configuration editor window ........................................................ 134
Fig. 70:
Appending a CanMaster using CoDeSys 2.3 ..................................................... 134
Fig. 71:
Appending the FX0-GCAN using CoDeSys 2.3 ................................................... 135
Fig. 72:
PDO configuration using CoDeSys 2.3 ............................................................... 135
Fig. 73:
PDO properties dialog in CoDeSys 2.3 ............................................................... 135
Fig. 74:
Controls and status indicators FX0-GDEV.......................................................... 161
Fig. 75:
DIP switch settings on the FX0-GDEV................................................................. 162
Fig. 76:
Setting the DeviceNet address of the FX0-GDEV............................................... 163
Fig. 77:
Open style connector and assignment FX0-GDEV ............................................. 163
Fig. 78:
DeviceNet bus cable ........................................................................................... 164
Fig. 79:
Configuration of the type of communication based on the example of the
DeviceNetManager™ from Allen Bradley ........................................................... 165
Fig. 80:
Selection of input data set 1 and output data set 1 using
DeviceNetManager™ from Allen Bradley ........................................................... 165
Fig. 81:
Selection of input data set 3 and output data set 1-5 using
DeviceNetManager™ from Allen Bradley ........................................................... 165
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
195
Chapter 9
Annex
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
196
Fig. 82:
Default configuration for the operational data transmitted into the
network .................................................................................................................174
Fig. 83:
Toolbar for the routing configuration ..................................................................175
Fig. 84:
Gateway direct output values in the default process image .............................177
Fig. 85:
Defining additional gateway direct output values in the process image ..........178
Fig. 86:
Network to Flexi Soft dialog of the FX0-GMOD...................................................179
Fig. 87:
Tag names of incoming bits in the logic editor dialog of the FX3-CPUx............180
Fig. 88:
Active and inactive bits in the online process image.........................................181
Fig. 89:
Inactive Network input bits as a result of an error.............................................181
Fig. 90:
Network output bits with no tag names assigned in the online process
image ....................................................................................................................181
Fig. 91:
Dimensional drawing FX0-GENT, FX0-GMOD, FX0RGPNT and FX0-GETC
(mm)......................................................................................................................186
Fig. 92:
Dimensional drawing FX0-GPRO, FX0-GCAN and FX0-GDEV (mm) ...................187
Fig. 93:
EC declaration of conformity (page 1) ................................................................188
Fig. 94:
EC declaration of conformity (page 2) ................................................................189
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Annex
Chapter 9
Flexi Soft Gateways
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
197
Chapter 9
Annex
Operating Instructions
Flexi Soft Gateways
198
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
Operating Instructions
Annex
Chapter 9
Flexi Soft Gateways
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19
Subject to change without notice
© SICK AG • Industrial Safety Systems • Germany • All rights reserved
199
8012664/XR03/2013-11-19 ∙ RV/XX (2013-12) ∙ A4 sw int41
Australia
Phone+61 3 9457 0600
1800 334 802 – tollfree
E-Mailsales@sick.com.au
Belgium/Luxembourg
Phone +32 (0)2 466 55 66
E-Mail info@sick.be
Brasil
Phone+55 11 3215-4900
E-Mail sac@sick.com.br
Canada
Phone+1 905 771 14 44
E-Mail information@sick.com
Česká republika
Phone+420 2 57 91 18 50
E-Mail sick@sick.cz
China
Phone +86 4000 121 000
E-Mail info.china@sick.net.cn
Phone +852-2153 6300
E-Mailghk@sick.com.hk
Danmark
Phone+45 45 82 64 00
E-Mail sick@sick.dk
Deutschland
Phone+49 211 5301-301
E-Mail info@sick.de
España
Phone+34 93 480 31 00
E-Mail info@sick.es
France
Phone+33 1 64 62 35 00
E-Mail info@sick.fr
Great Britain
Phone+44 (0)1727 831121
E-Mail info@sick.co.uk
India
Phone+91–22–4033 8333
E-Mail info@sick-india.com
Israel
Phone+972-4-6881000
E-Mail info@sick-sensors.com
Italia
Phone+39 02 27 43 41
E-Mail info@sick.it
Japan
Phone+81 (0)3 3358 1341
E-Mail support@sick.jp
Magyarország
Phone+36 1 371 2680
E-Mail office@sick.hu
Nederland
Phone+31 (0)30 229 25 44
E-Mail info@sick.nl
SICK AG |Waldkirch|Germany|www.sick.com
Norge Phone+47 67 81 50 00
E-Mail austefjord@sick.no
Österreich
Phone+43 (0)22 36 62 28 8-0
E-Mail office@sick.at
Polska
Phone+48 22 837 40 50
E-Mail info@sick.pl
România
Phone+40 356 171 120
E-Mail office@sick.ro
Russia
Phone+7-495-775-05-30
E-Mail info@sick.ru
Schweiz
Phone+41 41 619 29 39
E-Mail contact@sick.ch
Singapore
Phone+65 6744 3732
E-Mail sales.gsg@sick.com
Slovenija
Phone+386 (0)1-47 69 990
E-Mail office@sick.si
South Africa
Phone+27 11 472 3733
E-Mail info@sickautomation.co.za
South Korea
Phone+82 2 786 6321/4
E-Mail info@sickkorea.net
Suomi
Phone+358-9-25 15 800
E-Mail sick@sick.fi
Sverige
Phone+46 10 110 10 00
E-Mail info@sick.se
Taiwan
Phone+886-2-2375-6288
E-Mail sales@sick.com.tw
Türkiye
Phone+90 (216) 528 50 00
E-Mail info@sick.com.tr
United Arab Emirates
Phone+971 (0) 4 8865 878
E-Mail info@sick.ae
USA/México
Phone+1(952) 941-6780
1 800 325-7425 – tollfree
E-Mail info@sickusa.com
More representatives and agencies
at www.sick.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising